JP6724662B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a mechanism for enabling the fraud prevention against fraud (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-26573, A

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the fraud prevention function. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having a good function of preventing fraud.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a game device for use during the game, a receiving means for one side is the side that can accept the game means is released to open, the receiving means and a closure means capable of closing the one side, the closure means comprises an arrangement means disposed in a path communicated between the gaming unit and an external, said arrangement means, wherein A plate-like portion arranged below the game means so as to intersect with the path, a first extending portion extending downward from the plate-like portion, and a lower side from the plate-like portion. A second extending portion that extends toward the first extending portion and faces the first extending portion .

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a board box .

According to the gaming machine described in claim 1, the function of preventing fraud can be improved.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 1, the board can be housed in the board box.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6A. 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7A. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. It is a rear perspective view of an operating device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of an operating device. 14A is a front view of the tilting device, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a XIVc- of FIG. 14A. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in the XIVc line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear surface disassembled perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 17A is a front view of the drive device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the drive device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A. It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. 18A is a side view of the left disc cam when viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 18B is a side view of the left disc cam when viewed in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. 18. (A) And (b) is a front view of a releasing member and a rotating claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). (A) is a side view of a slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a releasing member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operating device in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. 59A is a side view of the lower frame member, FIG. 59B is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A, and FIG. 59C is FIG. 59A. FIG. 7 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59A and 59B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59A. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65(a), FIG. 65C is a sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. FIG. 66A is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66B is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66A. 6A is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 6B is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. Is. 6A is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. Is. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the drive device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member, and a 2nd transmission member of a left disk cam. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a right disc cam. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a partial side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74A. Is. (A) is a front view of a ring member, (b) is a rear view of a ring member, (c) is a side view of the ring member in the arrow LXXVIc direction view of Fig. 76 (a). 77A is a front view of the engaging member, and FIG. 77B is a side view of the engaging member as viewed from the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77A. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78(a), and (c) is a right disc cam. 78D is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 78C, FIG. 78E is a front view of the right disc cam, and FIG. FIG. 79 is a side view of the right disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e). (A) And (b) is a partial cross section figure of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section figure of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section figure of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section figure of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state where the inner frame was opened (developed) with respect to the outer frame. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack is opened with respect to the inner frame while the inner frame is opened with respect to the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is closed with respect to the outer frame and the front frame is opened (developed). It is a front view of a pachinko machine in the state where the front frame was removed. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are disassembled and shown. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are disassembled and shown. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a binding movable member in which a released state and a fixed state of the binding movable member are illustrated side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in Fig. 94(a). 95A is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and FIG. 95B is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95A. (A) is a schematic back view schematically showing the binding movable member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) shows the binding movable member and the harness. FIG. 96 is a schematic rear view schematically shown, and FIG. 96D is a schematic top view of FIG. 96C. (A) And (b) is an upper surface schematic diagram of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and a harness which illustrates typically a binding movable member and a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an expansion front view of the 1st bending field. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. 112A is a side view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 112B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112A. FIG. 11A is a side view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 11B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113A. (A) is a side view of a right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and FIG. 115B is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115A. It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper side frame member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of an upper side frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front side assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear side assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and (c) of FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124 is a top view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124A is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper side frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124A, and FIG. 9 is a partial cross-sectional view of a front side assembly, a rear side assembly, an upper frame member, a main body frame, and an upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 127(a) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame taken along the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b). (A) And (b) is a side view of the board surface support device and the game board which showed the board surface support device and the game board typically. (A) is a front perspective view of a board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. (A) is a front perspective view of a board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a board|surface support apparatus. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a board|substrate support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board|substrate support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board|substrate support apparatus. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a ball launch unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launch unit. (A) And (b) is a disassembled front perspective view of a ball launch unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of a sphere launching unit which shows the sending-out situation of the sphere by a sphere sending device in a time series. It is a front perspective view of a metal member for cutting. FIG. 14A is a front view of the ball launching unit, and FIG. 14B is a partial top view of the ball launching unit when viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146A. FIG. 14A is a front view of the ball firing unit, and FIG. 14B is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147A. It is a partial front view of a ball launching unit, an inner rail, and an outer rail after launching a ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the performance operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the performance operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 151 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operation device taken along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a rear perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central axis rotation device and a loose fitting device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a central axis rotation device and a loose fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal movement device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd production member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance/retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance/retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance/retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance/retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance/retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance/retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a petal operating device, (b) is a front view of a petal operating device, (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operation device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operation device. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of a petal operating device, (b) is a front view of a petal operating device, (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operation device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operation device. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of a petal operating device, (b) is a front view of a petal operating device, (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operation device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operation device. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device in a 12th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a partially expanded front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of a 12th embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operating device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device in the arrow CCIIIb direction view of FIG. 203(a), (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, 203D is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203A, and FIG. 203E is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203A. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the inner frame in a 14th embodiment in a line corresponding to a CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of Drawing 86. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. FIG. 16A is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 16B schematically shows an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIb of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. Yes, (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing the downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is shown in FIG. It is a partially expanded perspective view of the light guide member which typically represents the upward recessed part provided in the light guide member in the area CCVIe of (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 44, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) in front of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 in front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are provided. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 is placed below the lower tray 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray (not shown) is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. (See 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by the lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing or not by the lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with the lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a big hit round. Display numbers and errors. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. On the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, not only is the lottery result a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but also a big jackpot type is shown if it is a big hit. ..

Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a certainty jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

The "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state where the probability of big jackpot is not occurring, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is odd. In addition, the short-time state (time-shortening state) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the balls to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a opens at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4 ), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped with a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. Thereby, during the probability change and time reduction, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, and thus the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditors' product 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

In addition, during the probability change or the shortening, the winning probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball shot on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is carried out by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of the through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is carried out upon the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is high during the probability change and the shortening of the time period as compared with the normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability of being a jackpot is the same in the case where the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball wins the second winning opening 640 in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, so that the player can aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or the second winning opening 640 by "left-handed". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probability change, during the time saving, or during the normal), how to shoot the ball to the player. It is not necessary to change from "left-handed" to "right-handed". Therefore, the annoyance of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop symbol and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more plural pieces (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. It is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 71. The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as required.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut into sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 stores, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open/close and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is reached. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged in the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed by a player, and is provided in a region defined by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. It is arranged. A signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) when the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310.

A space is provided between the tilting device 310 and the accommodation recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a mode in which the fingertip is arranged on the inner side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

FIG. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6A, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7B is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7A.

6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 illustrates the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (the initial state in this embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the up-down direction, and in FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is changed from the first state. The state where the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and backward by being raised around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, performed by the player when a specific display (for example, “press button” display) appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, when the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by a method of dropping the hand vigorously like pushing in a button that moves up and down, for example, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves to the front side depending on the degree of tilting. There is a mode in which the palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed with each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping the hand down vigorously.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed and operated.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to forcefully drop the hand downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damaging the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's perspective will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII of FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow IX of FIG. 7. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of the hand of the player who pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is reduced in area from the player's point of view to the extent that it is invisible in the first state, but invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the area of the protective lens member 311i is gradually increased, and accordingly, the LED device 341f arranged inside the operation device 300 (see FIG. 12)), the difference in the amount of light that can be visually recognized by the player between the first state and the second state (the degree of light and darkness) becomes large, and the first state and the second state Can greatly change the appearance of the tilting device 310.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm side is lowered with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. By this (by rotating the wrist as an axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed and operated while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damaging the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft 314 on which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the voice coil motor 352 that gives a shock in the straight direction to the tilting device 310, and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state, move the tilting device 310 downward. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor for giving the driving force, etc. on the outer side of the lower frame member 320, the area inside the lower frame member 320 is largely used and the tilting is performed. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. Accordingly, it is possible to secure a large movable amount of the tilting device 310.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR1 respectively arranged at left and right end portions on the back side end portion (the back side end portion in FIG. 12), and the tilting device 310. A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and that defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. Is a member having a recessed portion disposed facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320. Along with the upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and the tilting device 310 via the arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and that forms a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. A drive device 340 that transmits a drive force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and that protects the drive device 340 by covering the drive device 340 from the left and right directions and the rear side are mainly provided.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right parts of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and includes a bottom plate portion 321 inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321. Of the tilting device 310, which is a horizontal portion 322 formed of a plate-like member that is horizontally arranged at the upper end portion on the far side of the rear portion, and a semicircular receiving portion that opens upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322. A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, a left detection sensor 324L that is arranged in a left and right pair below the bottom plate portion 321, a right detection sensor 324R, and a horizontal position at the center position of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction. An opening 325, which is an opening opened by cutting a portion arranged below the portion 322, is mainly provided.

The bottom plate portion 321 determines the movement end of the tilting device 310 by contacting the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings, through which the part of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. It

The bottom plate portion 321 is provided with a transmission hole 321a formed in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b formed along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right sides of the opening 325. Mainly provided are insertion holes 321c that are formed symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at the front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size through which the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 can pass. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects to the lower side of the bottom plate 321, the tilting device 310 can be given a driving force in the linear movement direction.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole configured to allow the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 to be inserted therethrough. By disposing the detection pieces 311gL, 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L, 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size such that the shaft portion 311c provided on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted, and the arm member when the drive device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed up to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, is extended upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section having an open portion on the front side. The locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. Since the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the separation distance (position of the detection groove) of the lower frame member 320 from the bottom plate portion 321 is equal on the left and right.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting portion that projects light and a light receiving portion that receives light from the light projecting portion, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. And a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, the drive device 340 has a configuration in which the LED device 341f is arranged so as to project to the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), and therefore the drive device is provided after the LED device 341f has passed through the opening 325. By pushing 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and compared with the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 347, the opening 325 is smaller. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged so as to face the opening 331 that is an opening of a size that catches the extending portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. And an upper bearing portion 332 configured to have a semicircular shape whose lower side is opened and which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be vertically dividable so as to cover three directions except the front side, and a main body cover 351 that is fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351. A voice coil motor 352 which is supported by the bottom plate and is disposed on the front side and whose vibration surface is directed obliquely upward and upward, a left side detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side The detection sensor 353R is mainly provided.

Note that FIG. 12 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L to the left and right center visible.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 is arranged such that the vibrating surface thereof is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320. As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 projects the protruding projecting portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. The disc cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged in a manner arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether the detection holes 344eL, 344eR of the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R, and detecting that the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in a specific phase. You can

In the present embodiment, the left and right disc cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, so that the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2. It becomes a kind.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14(a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. 14(c) is It is sectional drawing of the tilting device 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the tilting device 310 has a case body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having a side-fan shape and an opening at the top and the bottom, and an upper opening of the case body 311 is covered with a lid. A lid 312 that is fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 that is fastened and fastened to the front end portion of the lid 312 and hangs downward, and a mode in which the lid body 312 is sandwiched between the case body 311 and the lid 312. And a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and a ring shape for inseparably fixing the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the rear end portions of the case body 311 and the lid 312. The ring member BR1 is mainly provided.

The case main body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a that is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening portion 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and the left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. And a columnar shaft portion 311c extending from the flange protruding downward along the edge of the shaft toward the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d having a semicircular cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And an insertion groove 311e which is a groove arranged at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and which locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , A pair of left and right detection pieces 311gL extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15), and a predetermined amount extending from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side. An installation portion 311h, a protective lens member 311i formed above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a and formed along a circular arc around the shaft portion 314, and formed of a light-transmitting material; and a bottom plate portion. 311a is mainly provided with an overhanging projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the center portion in the left-right direction at the front side end portion of 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a columnar member that is inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits a driving force to and from the driving device 340. Equipped with.

The left side detection piece 311gL and the right side detection piece 311gR are portions which are inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. Is longer than the right detection piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311gL about the shaft 314 is approximately 3° (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the pushing end (see FIG. 22). 23), the left-side detection piece 311gL is protruded as compared with the right-side detection piece 311gR so that the rotation angle of the tilting device 310 is up to (see 23).

The extended portion 311h is a portion protruding from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 10), extends to a position where it is locked in the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330. It is composed of modes.

Since the protective lens member 311i has a curved shape in a top view (see FIG. 14A) and a curved shape in a left-right direction (see FIG. 14C), the player can The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 can be easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging protruding portion 311j is formed so as to protrude at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 29 ), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321 a, and the tip end thereof projects below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b. And a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape of a size that surrounds the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

In the first state (see FIG. 6 ), the cylindrical member 312 c improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 6 ), the light emitted from the LED device 341 f toward the tilting device 310 is cylindrical. While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such a limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be widely irradiated.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmissive material, has upper and lower end portions extending forward in a flange shape, and has extended end portions configured to match the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. A spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape is provided in the center.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 in a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer end portions of the twisted portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the paired twisted portions. , Is provided.

Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17A is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 18 is a driving device 340. FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that constitutes a framework by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and that generates a drive force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (a left disc cam 344L and a right disc cam that are non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343. 344R), the arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, the shaft portion 341c of the body member 341, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second portion of the disc cam 344. The releasing member 346 that comes into contact with the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, the rotating claw member 347 that is axially supported coaxially with the releasing member 346, and that relatively moves with the rotation of the releasing member 346, and the rotating claw member 347 are tilted down. The first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-shaped spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of making the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 have a torsion spring shape that generates an urging force in the direction of separating them from each other. A second spring SP2, which is a spring member, is mainly provided.

The main body member 341 is formed in the same position as the motor housing portion 341a that is bent leftward and rightward rearward and formed in a U-shape when viewed from the top, and the plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a that is disposed opposite to the motor housing portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that is provided in a left-right direction at a position deviated from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side in a mode having an axis parallel to the shaft of the shaft support hole 341b. An extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending from the motor housing portion 341a toward the front upper direction, and the lighting support portion 341e. An LED device 341f, which is arranged at the upper end portion and in which an LED light source is arranged, is mainly provided.

The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). As a result, the light of the LED device 341f can be evenly emitted upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

The fixed member 342a pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342, and also supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 has a perfect circular shape at one end thereof, a shaft support hole 345a axially supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and a rectangular shape at the other end. In addition, a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end of the disc cam 344 makes one rotation or more. It is formed at a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a columnar member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is axially supported by the columnar member 343a and meshes with a rotation gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the columnar member 343a by axial movement, and a coil spring 343d for pressing the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b. Mainly equipped with.

The columnar member 343a is provided with fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 having D-shaped sections for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed to be longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. It Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed in such a length that it can move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 into which the columnar member 343a is inserted, and a clutch in which irregularities are formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface arranged to face the movable clutch 343c. And a portion 343b2.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the columnar member 343a even when the columnar member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c is formed with an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the columnar member 343a is inserted, and a concavo-convex shape along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface arranged to face the transmission gear 343b. And a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

In this embodiment, the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of a mountain-shaped convex part and a concave part having a top angle of about 100°.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the columnar member 343a is disabled, so that the engagement between the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c. Thus, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the columnar member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. As a result, by rotating the drive motor 342, it becomes possible to rotate the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18).

The movable clutch 343c is usually arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the urging force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when a load is applied to the movable clutch 343c in the axial direction, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 in a manner separated from the transmission gear 343b.

The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the left and right disc cams 344L and 344R are roughly mirror-shaped in the disc cam 344, and only the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR are different, only the left disc cam 344L is provided. The description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20A is a side view of the left disk cam 344L viewed from the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the left disk cam 344L viewed from the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. is there. 20(a) and 20(b), the state where the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG. 18 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions that are provided so as to project from both sides of a perfect circular disc, and is located at the center position of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a protruding inward in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b protruding inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer portion of the circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. An engaging rib 344c having a portion that protrudes inward as a rib having a height lower than that of the circular rib 344b and has a portion projecting radially outward at two locations, and an outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d that is provided in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL that is formed near the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other components are configured by mirroring the shape of the left disc cam 344L. ..

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section whose inner periphery engages with both ends of the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 19), and has an outer periphery which is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). Composed. That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is provided so as to project to a position where it can contact the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the pivot hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c is a first protrusion that extends outward in the radial direction at a position displaced by 80° in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed. From the overhanging portion 344c1, the first retracting portion 344c2 retracting inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1=50° in the present embodiment), and from the first overhanging portion 344c1. At a position deviated by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in the present embodiment), a second overhanging portion 344c3 that is overhanged radially outward again, and an angle θ3 (in the present embodiment, an angle θ3 from the second overhanging portion 344c3). θ3=20°) and a second retracting portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction is mainly provided.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position with the longest distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

21A and 21B are front views of the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. Note that FIG. 21A illustrates a large angle state in which the rotation claw member 347 has rotated to the releasing member 346 to the urging direction end position of the second spring SP2, and in FIG. 21B, the releasing member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 is rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

Note that the state in which the release member 346 rotates by being brought into contact with the disc cam 344 is between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide elongated hole 347b. State) (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 346a axially supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), From the shaft support hole 346a, the projecting pin 346b that is provided in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and is projectingly provided in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a. An engagement portion 346d configured as a portion protruding with the maximum diameter is mainly provided.

The engaging portion 346d is a portion configured to be capable of contacting the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the engagement portion 346d is formed to be curved, so that the engagement rib 344 can be smoothly contacted.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongated hole 347b formed along the release member 346 such that the protruding pin 346b can be guided (a size including the movement locus of the protruding pin 346b inside) and the end of the second spring SP2. The insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d that is protruded downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end portion of the first spring (see FIG. 18) can be inserted. And a pull-down hole 347e formed in the main body.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A, the release member 346 is arranged at the end position in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21A) with respect to the rotation pawl member 347. Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load in the downward direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d, the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 integrally rotate in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion When a load in the pushing direction is applied to 346d, only the releasing member 346 can be rotated and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained until the small angle state shown in FIG. 21B is reached.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an operation example in the case where the player performs a pushing operation in the state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. Note that in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state illustrated in FIG. 22, and FIG. 23 illustrates the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand who repeatedly operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311 a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating claw member 347. Thereby, the tilting device 310 maintains its posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, the tilting device 310 is constantly applied with the urging force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22).

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left side detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been pushed in by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval at which the player continuously hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable because the player will not be able to return in time, and the player will push in at a halfway position.

Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is moved against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that is pushed down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost rises and the space cannot be saved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibrating operation is arranged at a position facing the overhanging protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310. It

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving this voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, it is possible to quickly perform the returning operation of the tilting device 310 without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. it can.

Here, if the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player long presses the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 will be driven and the player will be informed. Since an unnecessary load is given, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state during a predetermined period is calculated. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hit operation. This allows the player to comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of vertically reciprocating from the first state (raising operation) will be described. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.

Note that FIG. 25 illustrates the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 26 illustrates the state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. 27 shows a state in which the posture has changed, and FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated in the forward direction by a predetermined amount and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 has returned from the state shown in FIG. 26. 29 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocally rotates, FIG. 29 illustrates a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state of FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 illustrates a circle from the state illustrated in FIG. 29. A state in which the plate cam 344 has rotated in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c is brought into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346. Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of the hand of the player who pushes in the tilting device 310 is shown by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, a large amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be secured. Accordingly, the cylindrical member 312c can exert the effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the disc cam 344 is moved forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26). Direction), the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346 to rotate the releasing member 346 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Along with this, the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it disengages from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310.

Since the attitude change of the release member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other, the tilting device 310 twists during that time. It rises due to the biasing force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is in an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, The releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) by the urging force of the first spring SP1, and the rotating claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 27). 25). At this time, the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle (upper side angle in FIG. 27) between the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347, so the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. 347 rotates while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG.

In this state, the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area in which the protective lens member 311i can be visually recognized from the player's point of view increases as compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can be emitted in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction by the same amount ( By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 with respect to the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player with respect to the operation device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion projecting above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes corresponding to the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-back direction. Not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 28).

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and its irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves up from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the state in which the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push in and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c). Moves only in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed from being applied to the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end of pushing of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311 a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotary claw member 347 to move the rotary claw. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating the member 347 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and then pushing the tilting device 310, the rotary claw member 347 moves to the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the upward direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases the hand after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 28 is moved up and down, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs an oscillating operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). Thus, after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end, the vibration can be transmitted to the player who keeps his/her hand on the tilting device 310.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 is used for the purpose of generating a driving force for assisting the ascending of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position. Can be used for.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his/her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 causes the lower frame member 320 to move. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to push it to the end.

Therefore, as compared to a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, whether or not vibration by the voice coil motor 352 occurs at the end of pushing when the tilting device 310 is pushed in is determined by the player who pushed in the tilting device 310. Can only be grasped.

Whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means becomes low.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when a big hit is determined, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310. The value as a pre-reading means of can be improved. As a result, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating unit can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is moved in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 29 reverse direction) until the second projecting portion 344c1 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346. The drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction.

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344c1 contacts the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344c3 contacts the engaging rib 344c.

From the state of FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) so that the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d and then reverse rotation is performed. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained. it can.

Next, referring to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, in the case where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (raised) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (raising operation) through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 31, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30 to rotate the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). 32 is shown. FIG. 32 shows the state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31, and in FIG. 33, the state shown in FIG. From the state shown in FIG. 33, the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG. 33. Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 to operate is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 is tilted. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 causes the disc cam 344 to pass through the arm member 345. Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be moved up with a low resistance without being pulled by, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disc cam 344 is changed by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 are disengaged). It is possible to set the posture in which the 310 can be arranged in the second state (the posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 moves up at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state from the state of FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disc cam 344 interferes with the state change (the disc. It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and it takes a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 32, and subsequently the disc cam 344 is moved in the backward direction by the same amount ( By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 with respect to the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player with respect to the operation device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion projecting above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in accordance with the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 33, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-back direction. Not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33).

That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, as the vertical movement mode of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movements (a tilting movement), that is, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. This can be performed immediately after the restriction on the upward movement of the device 310 is released. Therefore, it is possible to create two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

As a result, compared to the case where the operation member 310 makes the same motion every time, it is possible to give the operation mode different meanings (for example, the difference in expectation of a big hit), and the player's attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state in which the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push in and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion). 311c only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed from being applied to the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing in the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311 a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating pawl member 347 to move the rotating pawl member 347 backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing in the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the upward direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down (see FIG. 34 ), when the player releases the hand, the tilting device 310 is set to the first state. Can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, an operation of setting the disc cam 344 in the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 after the player performs the pushing operation will be described. To do. By this method, it becomes possible to perform two types of vertical movements (tilting movements) of the tilting device 310 alternately or continuously one of them.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 35 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 36, the rotation cam 344 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. 35, and then the forward rotation direction is reached until the disc cam 344 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346 d of the release member 346. In the state shown in FIG. 37, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. The state in which the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. Note that, in FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging on the tilting device 310 from above is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated rearward (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c causes the engaging portion of the releasing member 346 to move. It abuts 346d. In this case, the posture of the releasing member 346 changes as the engaging rib 344c pushes up the releasing member 346, but the protruding pin 346b of the releasing member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide elongated hole 347b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotation pawl member 347 remains and is maintained in the posture shown in FIG.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disc cam 344 in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to release the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the rotation claw member 347 is used. It is possible to maintain the regulation of the rising of the tilting device 310.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and the rotation cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). The drive device 340 can be in the second initial state, as shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to stop the disc cam 344 accurately in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the second initial state shown in FIG. 36 is used. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, as described above, it is possible to perform the vertical movement (raising movement) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2.

Here, a player who pushes in the tilting device 310 can perform an operation of leaving his/her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. is there.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by forgetting to release the hand that pushed the surplus tilting device 310 that concentrates on the production, but in this case, even if the regulation by the rotating claw member 347 is released, the tilting device 310 rises. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs the reciprocating operation (forward/reverse switching operation) for vertically moving (stirring operation) the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While maintaining the state (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 is shown. In the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which (see FIG. 14) is turned on, the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not move upward due to the player's hand being above the tilting device 310. In this case, therefore, the state from the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. The change occurs by rotating drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the player's hand continues to be placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, and the drive motor 342 reciprocates (forward/reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. It is possible to avoid the operation), reduce the load on the drive motor 342, and extend the life of the motor.

Note that when the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be immediately rotated in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a device for preventing the drive device 340 from being destroyed will be described. 38 is a sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. Note that, in FIG. 38, the player's hand that holds and fixes the tilting device 310 in the state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is illustrated in phantom lines, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player holds and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state of FIG. 38. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be free to rotate with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disc cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are passed. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Accordingly, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

If the player is not gripping the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°) (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state). In addition, the player determines that he is intentionally performing an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and stops the gripping operation, for example, by displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 At the same time, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally makes an erroneous operation, and only at that time, it is possible to notify that the erroneous operation should be stopped, and at the same time, stop the drive motor 342 to prevent a failure. be able to.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disc cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are deviated. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be accurately operated (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state. , By restarting the control of the drive motor 352 (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342) with that state as the initial position, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c. The control can be performed in the state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are matched again.

As a result, when performing the effect by operating the tilting device 310, there is a gap between the operation that the tilting device 310 attempts to perform by the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation that the tilting device 310 actually performs. It is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, it is possible to properly operate the tilting device 310 and perform an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees in the forward direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and in FIG. 41, the disc cam 344 is further changed from the state shown in FIG. 40. The state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW is illustrated. Further, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees in the backward direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and in FIG. 43, the disc cam 344 is further changed from the state shown in FIG. The state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CW is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 stands up toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 40. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain that state in the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 42 toward the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c contacts the releasing member 346, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted up by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotation claw is rotated. No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, from the player's point of view, the first state shown in FIG. 38 to FIG. Is different from the operation shown in FIG. 41 or FIG.

For example, a difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by the control of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39). Due to the difference in change, the player becomes aware of the mode of control that is being performed, and the player may be aware of the effect that will be executed, which may reduce the player's interest. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load imposed on the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and then the operation of the tilting device 310 is changed, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is prevented. Since the directions are different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction in the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves from the first state to the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 moves toward the first state when the expectation level of the effect changes. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. As a result, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 rises up or maintains the first state. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player can move the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and the drive motor 342 moves toward the first state. Can be directed to watch over.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, the tilting device 310 and the driving device are driven by the player's erroneous operation when the drive motor 342 is driven. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, it is possible to eliminate the load given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped. Therefore, the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, regarding the case where the tilting device 310 performs the vertical movement without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player performs the operation of pushing down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode) explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 44 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340, and the first The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after the disc cam 344 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated in phantom lines. ..

As shown in FIG. 44, in the state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 engage the engaging portion of the releasing member 346. By reciprocally rotating the disc cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not to pass the 346d, the tilting device 310 can be vertically reciprocated while the posture of the release member 346 is maintained.

In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in the state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) along with the change in the posture of the release member 346, so that the tilting device 310 is operated in the manner shown in FIG. In the case of vertical movement, even if the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases the hand. When the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310, an operation mode can be performed in which the tilting device 310 moves above a position where the rising is restricted) and the vertical movement is continued.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, by providing a difference in performance between the first operation mode and the second operation mode described above and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to this embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether or not it was moving up or down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in performance, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode and the second motion mode (the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state when the tilting device 310 is pushed and then released. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues the up and down motion even if the hand is released after the tilting device 310 is pushed). Assuming that the jackpot is highly expected, it is possible to recognize the expectation whether or not to hit the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since the opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide a large number of timings when the player focuses on the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operating device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described. However, in the operating device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 causes the slide claw member 2348 to move. The slide claw member 2348 is configured to slide when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those in the above-described respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45B is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45C is a view of the release member 2346. It is a side view.

46A and 46B are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. ..

46(a) shows a large angular state in which the rotary plate member 2347 has rotated to the urging direction end position of the second spring SP2 with respect to the releasing member 2346, and in FIG. 46(b), with respect to the releasing member 2346. The small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated. The state in which the release member 2346 rotates by being brought into contact with the disc cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide elongated hole 347b. State) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotation member thereof as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). A slide claw member 2348 which is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 sandwiched therebetween and is configured to be slidable along an arcuate orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , Mainly. It should be noted that, in the releasing member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, configurations having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape in such a manner that it is slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and a forward portion at the upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b protruding in a hook shape (to the left in FIG. 45) and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged to be overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 47(a)). A reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the bending portion 2348a and a protruding pin 2348d that is provided in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c are mainly included. Prepare

The curved portion 2348a is set such that the width thereof is slightly shorter than the spacing width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 in a state of being fitted in the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and the magnetic material is disposed on the lower side surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that is attracted to the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion that faces the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface that faces the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The protruding pin 2348d is a columnar member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is configured by a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. When the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d is pushed by the side surface of the functional elongated hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotating plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, a pulling hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the sliding operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide member. And a support elongated hole 2347g into which the protruding pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotary plate member 2347, and the side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions that are arranged to face each other have the rotary plate member 2347 in the forward rotation direction (see FIG. In the state of being arranged at the end position of (46 counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).

The support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47), similarly to the rail portion 2347f. When the slide claw member 2348 is slid while the protruding pin 2348d is inserted into the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. It is possible to suppress wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a protruding pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engaging portion 346d, and a functional long hole 2346e that is a long hole formed in the thickness direction. ..

The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole having a width slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed of a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole 2346e1 and a second slot 2346e2 extending from one end of the first slot 2346e in a direction inclined toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the releasing member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. Slide to move.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole having a width slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as that of the protruding pin 2348d without a time delay with respect to the movement of the releasing member 2346. Reflected in speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 quickly slides, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 is also slowed.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft supporting hole 346a. Therefore, the force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

That is, in this embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide due to the release member 2346 rotating, the slide claw member 2347 is slid by pulling the slide claw member 2347 when the angle is large. It never moves. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310, the rise of the tilting device 2310 can be restricted.

47 to 49 are views showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 47 illustrates a state in which the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is disposed below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and in FIG. 48, the disc cam 344 changes from the state illustrated in FIG. 47. Is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engagement portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 moves in the rearward rotation direction (see FIG. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by 48 clockwise and returned by the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and is made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by the magnetic force. When the player pushes in the tilting device 2310 from this state, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped part 2348b is released due to the change in the posture of the tilting device 2310, so a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. There is no need to be.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by the magnetic force, when the releasing member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 moves in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved up at a speed different from the ascending movement when the restriction of the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is released (the fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the rising direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. .. As the operation mode increases, the operation mode and the expectation degree of the jackpot are associated with each other, so that the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a prefetching unit. The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310. Since the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the magnetic attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, a large magnetic force is applied to the tilting device 2310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. The load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his/her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the regulation by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. Also (even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, the player's hand is lifted in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in this manner.

Thereby, when the tilting device 2310 is raised, a difference can be provided in the load in the ascending direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his/her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference between the loads and the degree of expectation of a jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a prefetching means, and thus the attention degree of the operation device 2300 to the player can be increased. Can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state in which the player is pushed in by the player. However, the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment is described. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state in which it is pushed in by the player or in the state in which it is pushed in by the player. It The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right side detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left side detection piece 3311gL extending at a position which is a surface perpendicular to the axis and which is arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction, which is a position opposite to the right side detection piece 311gR). The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR, and has an extension length shorter than that of the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51A and 51B are side views of the operation device 3300. Note that FIG. 51A shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51B shows a state where the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. Further, in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap each other are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R. No (left detection sensor 324L is OFF and right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

As shown in FIG. 51B, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state of being pushed in from the first state to the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L, while the right side. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

By detecting the change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the midway state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, it is not in the pushing state. Can be detected.

That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the state of being in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the pushing terminal end. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the state of being pushed.

52A and 52B are side views of the operation device 3300. Note that FIG. 52(a) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pressing end, and FIG. 52(b) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the pressing end to the first state. .. Further, in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap each other are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52A, when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end, the left side detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52B, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state in which it is arranged at the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the state of being in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the pushing end, but that is the left side detection. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R has changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to give an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 descends. It is possible to effectively apply a load for raising the tilting device 3310 by causing the voice coil motor 352 to collide with the tilting device 3310 during the raising operation of the tilting device 3310, rather than by causing a collision.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of rising and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in operation, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18 ), the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 after pushing the tilting device 3310 from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the raising motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the consecutive hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 can be operated as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is described. Is a mode in which the tilting device 4310 detects an operating speed during the change from the second state to the first state and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k projecting in a plate shape from the front side of the projecting projecting portion 311j of the case body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper side detection sensor 4321d and the lower side detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) arranged on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection This is a part for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timings of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operating device 4300 illustrating a pressing operation of the operating device 4300 in time series. 54(a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54(a) to detect the front detection piece 4311k from the lower side. The state where the sensor 4321e is passed downward is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper side detection sensor 4321d and the lower side detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged with the detection groove oriented such that the front detection piece 4311k can pass therethrough. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20° on an arcuate orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player pushes the tilting device 4310 to change the state from the state shown in FIG. 54(a) to the state shown in FIG. 54(b), the front detection piece 4311k includes the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. 4321e and so on. By detecting the interval of the passage timing, the magnitude of the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and whether or not the voice coil motor 352 is driven is selected based on the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second position, the pushing-in length becomes longer (because the period during which acceleration is applied is longer). The upper limit of the operation speed of 4310 becomes high. Therefore, if the player does not have any deceleration means, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the end of pushing, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak force or a player who has decided to perform a gentle push operation, the fact that the reaction force is always large in the vicinity of the push position is a burden on the push operation, and it is easy to feel tired. Therefore, the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 may not be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 is determined by the interval of the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. This makes it possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, when the interval between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned on. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned timing interval is shorter than the predetermined period while not being driven, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in a mode of being driven.

Thereby, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. It can be pushed in.

Furthermore, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pushing is used as the reaction force against the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54( b ), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the overhanging protrusion 311 j of the tilting device 4310 overhangs below the lower frame member 4320. Every time, the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled so as to be pushed out in advance to the side closer to the tilting device 4310.

Thereby, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide with each other while pushing out the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operation device 4300. Note that FIG. 55(a) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing terminal end, and FIG. 55(b) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing terminal end. ..

Further, in FIGS. 55A and 55B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55( a ), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second state at high speed, the tilting device 4310 is projected while the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The installation portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing in the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting protrusion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed in moving to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 can be applied by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 has a structure in which a load is applied by electromagnetic force rather than a structure in which a load is applied by friction as in a disc brake, so that damage to members is suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the overhanging protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 have already contacted each other, so the state shown in FIG. 55(a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is The reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased by gradually increasing the current flowing from the ON state) to the voice coil motor 352.

Therefore, while the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 contact each other is suppressed, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state toward the pushing end. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged at the pushing-in end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the lower frame member 4320 in the rotation direction and stops descending. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibrating operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). Thereby, after pushing the tilting device 4310 and pushing it to the terminal end, it is possible to perform the effect of transmitting the vibration to the player who keeps his/her hand on the tilting device 4310.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating by vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56 to FIG. 68, an operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the voice coil motor 352 is vibrated to transmit the vibration to the player who pushes the tilting device 310, but the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment uses the lower frame member 5320. , A drive motor 5411 that rotates a weight member 5412 disposed at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric, and is configured to transmit vibration to a player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operating device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the driving device 340 is the driving device 5340, as compared with the operating device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configurations as in the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, a vibrating device 5400 accommodates a transmission device 5410 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. A flexible member 5420 and a bottomed dish having an open top surface, which accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in separate sections and is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430 is mainly provided.

The transmission device 5410 has a drive motor 5411 formed of an electric motor driven in rotation, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 axially supporting a portion corresponding to the point of the fan. And mainly.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of left and right fixing portions 5411a formed of a metal material in a flange shape on the side surface on which the shaft extends.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported by the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the drive motor 5411 and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body portion 5421 formed of a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and having a bottom on the side opposite to the insertion side, and in the assembled state, the main body portion 5421. A pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding in the shape of a rib and a rib-shaped leg portion 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body portion 5421 are connected to each other in the left and right direction and below in the radial direction. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a pair of projecting leg portions 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421 in a columnar shape.

The body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth that is the same as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end surface on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end surface on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. Further, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421. However, the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are larger than the posture maintaining portions 5423 on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422.

Since the protruding leg portion 5424 is formed in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by the tilt of the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 can be made fine.

The housing member 5430 is, in the assembled state, a first housing portion 5431 housing the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420, and a second housing portion adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and housing the weight member 5412. 5432 and a recessed groove 5433 recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the first housing portion 5431 and the second housing portion 5432 are mainly provided.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is from the upper surface when the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 reaches the bottom and the load applied during insertion is released (assembly load released state). The depth is such that the protruding leg portion 5424 projects.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load released state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and the flexible member. When 5420 is deformed (assembly load state), the depth is such that it interferes with the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412.

The groove 5433 has a width dimension that is slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension that extends slightly below the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411 in the assembly load state. It

59A is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59B is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59A, and FIG. ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. 59( a ). Note that in FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. Further, in FIG. 59(a), the first area S51, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the player is pushed into the player from the first state by three times. An end area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when arranged at the end position of pushing, is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 59( a ), the protruding leg portion 5424 is protrudingly provided in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the circular arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the maximum amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 with respect to the change in the angle of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 59( b ), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load released state in which the protruding leg portion 5424 is not loaded.

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the protruding leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the horizontal center line of the lower frame member 5320 as a reference in the extending direction. Therefore, the convex leg portions 5424 can be evenly pushed right and left on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from leaning leftward or rightward (inclining leftward or rightward in the plane of FIG. 59B) when pushing. Therefore, the protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59C, the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d in which the protruding leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is set to be slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the projecting leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is projected. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, the lateral deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the protruding leg portion 5424 can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

60A and 60B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59A. It should be noted that FIG. 60(a) shows the assembled load released state, and FIG. 60(b) shows that the projecting leg portion 5424 is in a state in which the tilting device 310 occupies the end region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)). The assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is illustrated. The outer shapes of the second storage portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), when a load is applied to the vibration device 5400 from the assembly load released state and the assembly load state is reached, the protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion are formed. As 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force that pushes back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. The impact when 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be mitigated. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38) is changed. The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the raising motion of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the consecutive hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 can be operated as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

As shown in FIG. 60A, in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is started in the assembled load released state, the vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself or the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and is prevented from being transmitted to the housing member 5430. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60B, in the assembled load state, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced upward and downward due to deformation of the upper protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422. Configured in an acceptable manner.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 changes to a state in which the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is further compressed vertically, and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped legs 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, the lower rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421, and are evenly spaced from the central axis to the left and right. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in a pair of left and right, the radially outer ends of the rib-shaped legs 5422 are moved outward in the left-right direction (at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped legs 5422). It deforms in such a manner that it moves to the one with smaller resistance (see FIG. 60(b)). In this case, since the protruding direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged below the main body portion 5421 has a horizontal component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. .. Therefore, in the assembling load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodating portion 5432 collide is partly generated by the elastic force of the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 of the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. As a result, displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61A and 61B are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A.

61(a) and 61(b) show an assembled load state, and FIG. 61(a) shows a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis. In b), a state is shown in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation shaft. 61(a) and 61(b), the state of the vibrating device 5400 when the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the end region S52 is illustrated.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the gravity center position of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side in the assembling load state, the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is set to a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second accommodating portion 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is arranged. In the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 abuts (rubs) the second accommodating portion 5432. Therefore, compared with the assembling load released state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and different kinds of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

The contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 generates a repulsive force that moves the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61B). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 move toward and away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57 ), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). ) Can be easily directed. This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves upward in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). It can reinforce the force to push back in the

As described above, the force that pushes up the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is separated into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. By using a combination of generated forces, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the time when the tilting device 310 starts contacting the protruding leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59A). After the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the end region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be lightened and the impact at the time of pushing operation can be mitigated. This adjustment can be performed while the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is unnecessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left side detection piece 311gL and the length of the right side detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) due to the difference in detection timing. It is determined whether or not the operation speed of) is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/hour), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operation speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 applies the tilting device 310 to the tilting device 310 in order to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desired to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is previously operated so as to be in the downward (see FIG. 61B) posture.

Thereby, the end of the descending operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation shaft is raised from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 upward by the radius Ra. Accordingly, in comparison with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61A) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61A), the drive motor 5411 is provided on the upper side. The movable region of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although not described in the present embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and not between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion that touches the tilting device 310, for example, a portion that touches the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Therefore, the palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum of pushing and a part of the side surface of the hand can be transmitted. The vibration can be transmitted to the player via the. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the weight member 5412 is set only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibrating device 5400 forms the assembly load state. And the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in the rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the pushing operation by the player is detected. The vibration can be easily transmitted to the player, as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and immediately after pushing the tilting device 310, the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 is pushed. Therefore, there is a possibility that vibration cannot be generated before the player releases his/her hand (the start of vibration cannot be delayed), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in and preparation for vibration is completed, so that vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed. This allows the player to experience the effect of vibration.

Further, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first storage portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Therefore, the state in which the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is a disk cam 5344 and a transmission shaft rod 5343. Others are the same as those of the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed at the center of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L have symmetrical shapes, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right circular plate cam 5344R and the right circular plate cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arm portions A1 for sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 is arranged in a connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. Is.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R has, at the center position thereof, a support cylindrical portion P1 extending in a cylindrical shape from the disc portion to the side where the circular rib 344b is disposed, and an axial direction of the support cylindrical portion P1. Along the position of about half of the extending distance, a long hole concave portion C1 that is concavely formed from the disk portion in the shape of an axially symmetrical long hole, and a shaft of the support cylinder portion P1 that is concavely formed by the long hole concave portion C1. It mainly includes a pair of holding arm portions A1 extending from the end portions in the direction toward the disc portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylindrical portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that is arranged in the same axial direction as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole concave portion C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disc cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part.

The elongated hole concave portion C1 is formed such that the shape of the concave cross section is slightly longer than the width dimension of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the sandwiching arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the recessed cross section of the elongated hole recess C1.

Further, the opposing surfaces of the long hole recess C1 are configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixed portion 5343a1 of the columnar member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed as a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed as an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the columnar member 5343a from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The holding arm portion A1 is provided with an engagement convex portion A1a that is provided so as to project from a surface of the pair of arm portions, which faces the other arm, toward the other arm portion. .. The engaging convex portion A1a engages with the tip end portion of the columnar member 5343a when connecting with the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the columnar member 5343a from coming off from the disc cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging convex portion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the columnar member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engagement protrusion A1a is engaged with the engagement groove 5343a4 (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction can be secured long.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (a long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disc cam 5344R and is provided along the axis near the axis. It is arranged at a position which is a surface position with the side surface on the opening side of C1).

As a result, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engaging protrusion A1a can be completed on the side of the supporting cylinder portion P1 (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b). reference). Therefore, as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the columnar member 5343a on the outer side of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63(b)), the length by which the columnar member 5343a extends from the recessed surface portion C2 is determined by Can be shortened by the thickness (see FIG. 65(b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring by contacting the surface with the e-ring) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disc cam 5344R. Therefore, the recessed area (radial area) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disc cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

The columnar member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cams 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 sandwiching the fitting groove 5343a3 from the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section, a fitting groove 5343a3 for fitting the e-ring, and a positioning of the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring, and the fitting groove An engagement groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the engagement protrusion A1a of the holding arm A1 is engaged when the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3, Prepare In the assembled state, the fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are formed.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and in the assembled state, the movable clutch 343c slides by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

Since the e-ring is used to form a portion of the columnar member 5343a in which the diameter is partially increased by later fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3, before the e-ring is fitted, The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter being uniform, the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62) by a predetermined amount, and then the e-ring is fitted to the shaft support hole 341b. It is possible to prevent the positional displacement along the axis and the axial displacement of the disc cam 5344 by the e-ring.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the columnar member 5343a is defined as the side of the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 where the engagement protrusion A1a is arranged. Insert from the opposite end to the position where the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before inserting the engagement protrusion A1a into the engagement groove 5343a4 to the position where the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted, the tip end of the columnar member 5343a is inserted between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a The holding arm portions A1 are elastically deformed in such a manner that the mutual distances can be widened. After that, when the tip end of the columnar member 5343a passes through the engagement protrusion A1a, the engagement protrusion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engagement protrusion A1a fits into the engagement groove 5343a4. Then, the sandwiching arm portion A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only as one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing breakage in the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65(b) is a view of the right disk cam 5344R taken along the line LXVb-LXVb of FIG. 65(a). 65C is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65A. 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66(b) is a right disc cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

In FIG. 66, the right disc cam 5344R after deformation when the player gives an overload to the right disc cam 5344R in the unloaded state shown in FIG. 65 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extending distal end side portion of the support cylindrical portion P1 at a position separated from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R, In the vicinity of the portion, the engagement protrusion A1a only engages with the engagement groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the columnar member 5343a or the right disc cam 5344R, the columnar member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting about the extended distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1 as an axis.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the columnar member 5343a against axial displacement is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the columnar member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R are extended in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R. Since and abut, the resistance of the column member 5343a against axial displacement is increased.

Therefore, when the player forcibly presses (pulls up) the tilting device 310 to give an overload to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). (When a load that restricts the load is applied), the direction in which the right disc cam 5344R deforms with respect to the columnar member 5343a can be limited.

That is, since the right disc cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of low resistance, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), On the plane parallel to the plane of the disc portion, the disc portion is tilted and deformed about the support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support tubular portion P1. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG. 65(a).

67A is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 67B is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67A. FIG. 27 is a partial rear view of device 5300. 67(b), the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67(a), for the sake of easy understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted through and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to the outer shaft to tilt The outline of the completed state is shown by an imaginary line.

67A, the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is illustrated in an enlarged manner. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in the place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load occurs, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the above-described shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be relieved.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is illustrated by an imaginary line. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the outer periphery of the right disc cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd as the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the axial support of the arm member 345 is caused by this dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and in order to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R is deformed by tilting the shaft.

Due to the axial tilt deformation, the connecting pin 344d is tilted with respect to the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67(a), so that the center Pb of the connecting pin 344d on the base side and the center Pt of the protruding tip side are on the right circle. The plate cam 5344R is displaced along the circumferential direction. This misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of the right disc cam 5344R, so that the drive motor is held while the tilting device 310 is gripped. When driving 342 (see FIG. 62), the load applied to drive motor 342 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other with a surface contact. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344. Therefore, the player drives the drive motor 342 with the tilting device 310 held and fixed. In such a case, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but in the direction repelling it, the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotation claw member 347 is stopped by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stopped, the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pressed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 is repulsed in that direction. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the releasing member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the movement direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or Among the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344 can be increased. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased. Can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction.

In the present embodiment, the right disc cam 5344R is formed in a shape that is line-symmetric with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). Since the elongated hole concave portion C1 is extended to the right disc cam 5344R, the right disc cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the displacement direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The axis can be deformed by resistance.

68A is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 68B is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68A. FIG. 27 is a partial rear view of device 5300. 68(b), the illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 68(a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted through and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is given to the shaft to cause the shaft to fall. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

68A, the tilting device 310 is driven from the second state by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) and tilted downward by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. A player's hand grasping is shown.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 5344R regardless of whether or not the tilting device 310 is in the second state. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right circular plate cam 5344R by tilting the shaft of the shaft, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right circular plate cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

Note that the items described as the right circular disc cam 5344R are the same as those of the left circular disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the player holds the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disc cam 5344R tilts with respect to the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of the tilting motion with respect to the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, when the drive motor 342 is driven for the period in which the right disc cam 344R makes one revolution, the detection hole 344eR of the right disc cam 344R passes through the right side detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the right side detection sensor Since the input to the 353R does not change, it is detected that overload has occurred.

In this case, until the occurrence of overload is detected, it takes a period for rotating the right disc cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state where no overload occurs, so that there is a problem that the detection of overload is delayed. there were.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disc cam 5344R tilts with respect to the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload is not detected. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, a method using the notification device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylindrical portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is illustrated (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66A). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object contacts the input portion, and is arranged in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect each other. In addition, the input portion is arranged so as to project toward the support cylinder portion P1. In the unloaded state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overloaded state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (FIG. 65). 66(b)). Accordingly, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disc cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73, an operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but the operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment is the disc cam 344 and the engaging rib. 344c is a separate member and is rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

69 is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of a disc member 6344L1, a ring member 6344L2, and a second transmission member 6348 of a left disc cam 6344L. Is. The right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, but since the right disk cam 6344R is configured as a mirror image of the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be given. Only the right disk cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a are different, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left circular disc cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL as in the first embodiment, and has a circular disc member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a, and the circular disc member 6344L1. And a ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported and that rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

The disk member 6344L1 has a ring shape in the axial direction in a position in which the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disk portion and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided so as to project along the annular rib 6344f.

The ring member 6344L2 has an annular main body 6344g having the same outer peripheral diameter as the engaging rib 344c of the first embodiment and an inner peripheral diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and its circular shape. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. And a receiving gear tooth 6344i which is formed on the outside in the radial direction in the thickened portion.

The inner diameter of the annular body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. Therefore, when the annular body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b in the assembled state, the central shaft portion 344a is not fitted. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about the center.

The end surface of the circular ring main body 6344g on the side of the circular disc member 6344L1 contacts the circular ring rib 6344f. As a result, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface abuts on the disc member 6344L1. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disc member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i are meshed with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In the present embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disc member 6344L1 (while the disc member 6344L1 makes one revolution while the ring member 6344L2 makes three revolutions). , The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary column member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the columnar member 343a, and its auxiliary column. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c and mainly.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the raising operation of the tilting device 310 after removing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state of the tilting device 310 is configured by a plurality of types.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and in FIG. 72, the posture (correctly, the ring member 6344R2 makes one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71. A state in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) by ⅓ in a backward rotation direction after rotating more than one rotation Is illustrated. Further, FIG. 73 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344L2 rotates in the forward direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state illustrated in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 moves upward.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is caused by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It instantly rises and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the arrival position when the tilting device 310 is lifted up instantaneously (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is the second state. It was limited to the position (see FIG. 34) to be arranged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disc member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is a supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c. It is possible to change the relative relationship between the tilting device 310 and the reaching position of the tilting device 310.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 instantly rises by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and is tilted downward by the angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously operated (the disc cam is rotated) when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 71 and when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. It is possible to change the position at which the position is reached (without waiting for the rotation of 344) and reached.

Thus, for example, when the tilting device 310 is configured to change the expectation level of the effect due to the difference in height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state, the attention power of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation of the tilting device 310 that rises higher or the degree of expectation that the tilting device 310 has a lower ascending position is increased.

However, by keeping the normal rising position of the tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximized, Can be associated with the magnitude of the displacement amount by which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to operate, and the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is raised, so that the player watches the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. Can be directed to do so. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the game method of randomly operating the tilting device 310.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85, an operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 is a disc member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged in separate members, and the separate members are configured to be capable of forming a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they can rotate relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. FIG. 75(b) is a sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 75(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). The right disk cam 7344L is formed by a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R includes a disc member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and the disc member 7344R1. Of the ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member and the engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally-divided recess 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. And an engaging member 7344R3 having

The disc member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a in the center, and is provided with a detection hole 344eR in a portion extending in a flange shape from the edge of the cup toward the radially outer side, and the engaging rib. 344c is a member that is configured so as to be partially omitted (the space between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 by a surface in an assembled state, and is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a first circular recessed portion 7410 thereof. The first circular recessed portion 7410 has a diameter smaller than that of the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion that is deep in the axial direction, and the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be bored, and a fixing protruding radially outward from the back side surface (outer peripheral side of the disc member 7344R1) of the second circular recessed portion 7420 in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430. The protrusion 7440 is mainly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 is a rectangular oblong hole portion that is elongated along the axial direction of the disc member 7344R1 at a position displaced from the intermediate position between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. The long hole 7431 and the second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the circular plate member 7344R1 from the bottom end of the circular plate member 7344R1 of the first long hole 7431. And a return portion 7433 configured by projecting toward the second elongated hole 7432 side with the first elongated hole 7431 side at the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.

The dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 in the width direction (shorter direction) is smaller than the dimension of the first elongated hole 7431 in the width direction (shorter direction), and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (transverse direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 75(b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and has a protruding height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76(a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(c) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76(a). It is a side view of ring member 7344R2.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 includes a ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is provided in a protruding manner, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. A thick-walled portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along with and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center thereof.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension that is equivalent to the recess depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension that is slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410. It Accordingly, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the resistance of relative rotation from becoming excessive while making the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 coincide with each other.

The thick portion 7520 has a length that extends from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to reach (do not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)). However, it is made slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This prevents the resistance of relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 from becoming excessive while allowing the engagement member 7344R3 to move in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) in the assembled state. can do.

The thick-walled portion 7520 has irregular shaped through holes 7521 formed along the axial direction, and concave portions of the irregular shaped through holes 7521 radially outwardly at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, five equal portions). And an equally divided recessed portion 7522 that is provided.

The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. Composed.

77(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed from the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a).

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the engaging member 7344R3 is located outside the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)). Arcuate plate portion 7610 disposed in one direction, an extending portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from a rear side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 77(b)) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and its extension. The engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 77(b)) from the extending distal end of the portion 7620 and the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 are disposed on the side facing the engaging portion 7630. A coil spring CS1 formed of a coil spring is mainly provided.

The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611, which is a protrusion into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the tip end portion of the engagement portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extended portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extended portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction so as to face the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extended distal end thereof is The ring member 7344R2 has an extension length that extends inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 also has a function as a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and a function that positions the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

Referring to FIG. 78, a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described. 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as seen from the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a). 78C is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 78D is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 78C, and FIG. FIG. 78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as seen from the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

78(a), 78(b), 78(c) and 78(d), a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disc member 7344R1 is shown, and FIG. ) And FIG. 78(f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disc member 7344R1. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown in FIGS. 78(b), 78(d) and 78(f).

As a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, the dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 in the width direction is made shorter than the dimension of the engaging portion 7630 in the width direction, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, an assembly error can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, slide the engaging member 7344R3 in the depth direction of FIG. 78(d) to a position where the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 are in the same position. Moving.

At the position after this movement, the fixed protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 is prevented from being displaced in the circumferential direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) of the disc member 7344R1 and is engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1.

The engagement member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven to the outside of the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Then, when the engagement member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engagement member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is elastically restored to the second position. It enters into the inside of the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

In a state where the return portion 7433 enters the inside of the second elongated hole 7432, the tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large. (FIG. 78(d)), the movement of the extended portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. As a result, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during the operation.

After holding the engaging member 7344R3 on the disc member 7344R1, insert the ring member 7344R2 from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 with the engaging member 7344R3 pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. To do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move along the direction D7 that is directed outward in the radial direction. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally-divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disc member 7344R1.

The right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled by the steps described above. The right disc cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction will be described. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b), and 81, the releasing member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are shown as the center, and others. Illustration of unnecessary portions is omitted.

The rotating claw member 7347 in this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to terminate the movement at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts and passes from below.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the upper rear portion (upper right portion of FIG. 80(a)) of the main body portion is obliquely cut in order to minimize the interference with the engaging rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79(a)). Are illustrated in time series.

79(a) illustrates a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R abuts the releasing member 7346 and the releasing member 7346 starts to rotate, and in FIG. 79(b), FIG. ), the state where the right disc cam 7344R is further rotated is shown. In FIG. 80(a), the state where the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disc member 7344R1 and pushed to the end is shown. 80B shows a state in which the disk member 7344R1 further rotates in the rearward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 80A. In FIG. 81, the right disc cam is changed from the state shown in FIG. 80B. The state after the 7344R rotates in the rearward rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is illustrated. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), and 80(b), the state in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which the release member 7346 can rotate relative to the rotary pawl member 7347 ( The small angle state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2 in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting each other. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of protruding outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engagement portion 346d of the release member 7346 is in contact with the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 are in a small angle state. To be done.

In the present embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state. In the positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c are in contact with each other, the disc cam 7344 has a positional relationship. They are arranged (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disc cam 7344, and the state in which the release member 7346 cannot rotate any more (small angle state) is reached, the release member is released. A load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344 is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 from the 7346.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79( b ), when the engaging member 7344R3 is bulged outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backward rotation direction cannot be continued. Therefore, based on the rotation of the disc cam 7344, The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward of the smallest diameter portion of the odd-shaped through hole 7521.

Therefore, the circumferential load is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80(b), by rotating the disc member 7344R1 from the state shown in FIG. 80(a). Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from the originally arranged equally divided concave portion 7522 to another different equally divided concave portion 7522. Therefore, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 are moved. The phase of and is relatively rotated by the amount of one concave portion (72 degrees).

Then, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disc cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. Then, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally-divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, one equally-divided recessed portion 7522 that accommodates the engaging portion 7630 is displaced.

That is, by going through the process shown in FIG. 79(a) to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into concave portions 7522. It is possible to relatively shift the concave portion by the arrangement interval (72 degrees).

With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82(a), 82(b), 83(a) and 83(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 82, the releasing member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are illustrated as the centers, and the illustration of other unnecessary portions is omitted.

82(a) to 83(b), the manner in which the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)) is illustrated in time series. 82(a) shows the state immediately before the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R contact each other, and in FIG. 82(b), the engaging member 7344R3 moves upward to the releasing member 7346. From the state shown in FIG. 82(b), the disc cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 82(b). In (b), the state after the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R are separated is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 move in the backward rotation direction (see FIG. 82(a) clock). When rotating in the rotation direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347, and the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. It will only be done.

Therefore, a load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction does not occur, and the engaging member 7344R3 stays radially outward from the time when the engaging member 7344R3 abuts the release member 7346 until the engaging member 7344R3 separates. Maintain the overhang. Therefore, when the disc cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

With these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83 ), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width as in the first embodiment, while Unlike the first embodiment, the tilt width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81).

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they coincide with each other, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

Accordingly, a state in which the player is not paying attention (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative postures of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a state invisible to the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that according to the present embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of types of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. In FIG. 84, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately changed from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B (without rotating the disc cam 7344). ) A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disc member 7344R1 in a phase relationship capable of being displaced is shown. In FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 84 through the process described in FIG. 79. , A state in which the disk member 7344R1 is rotated by one of the equally-divided recessed portions 7522 is shown. In both of FIGS. 84 and 85, the second overhanging portion 344c3 contacts the engaging portion 346d. The contact state is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 immediately (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state. You can change the range of movement.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced rearward and downward from the position shown in FIG. 84. It moves to the state where it sinks below 2 states.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 reaches immediately (without rotation of the disc cam 7344) from the first state by the ascending operation can be changed. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 and improve the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

Although the case where the front side of the operating device 300 is exposed has been described in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes the cover cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operating device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

It should be noted that in the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the drawing as the front (front) side and the back side of the drawing as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side, respectively. Further, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. The definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG. 86.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state where the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 in a state where the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. 89 is FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (developed), and FIG. 90 is a pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. FIG. Note that, in FIG. 90, for convenience, reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed with a wooden plate member as an upper side and a lower side and an aluminum plate member as left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game arcade by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In addition, in the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable structure, but has the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11 are provided. The members that the player has may be provided in the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation front end side in front view. It can be rotated forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is a rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is a rotation side in a front view. The movable front end side (opening/closing front end side) is rotatable rearward.

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating front end, and functions to lock the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 such that the front frame 14 cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, an exclusive key is inserted into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform the unlocking operation. By doing so, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door attachment fittings 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door attachment fittings 57, 58 (the fitting 57 is a columnar portion, and the fitting 58 is a shaft). By engaging the inner frame 12 with a metal plate having holes, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

More specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the rear side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recessed portion 12e1 (see FIG. 126) which is provided with a fitting size. Further, the front door mounting member 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in the configuration in which columns having different diameters are vertically arranged, the diameter of the upper column is smaller). It is pivotally supported by being externally fitted to a support pin 19a having a small shape.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is almost the same as that of the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed of a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (illumination parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) on the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having a smaller opening than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in front view (see FIG. 86). By covering the window portion 14c from the back side with the glass unit 16, almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 is covered with the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached. Therefore, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having a larger outer shape than the window 14c and transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And are equipped with. The fixed frame is made of synthetic resin in a ring shape slightly larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame, so that the glass unit 16 becomes an integrated double-glazing unit. Has been done.

The glass unit 16 is formed of transparent glasses 16a and 16b so as to be colorless and transparent, but the glass unit 16 may be made of synthetic resin so as to be colorless and transparent, and may be formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. If the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored and transparent rather than colorless and transparent.

Around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of electric decoration portions 8029 to 8033 having light emitting means such as LEDs built therein are provided. In these illumination parts 8029 to 8033, lighting or blinking is performed in accordance with a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, a light emitting unit that is turned on when a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls or the like and a light emitting unit that is turned on during payout of a prize ball are built in the electric decoration section 8030 on the upper side of the window 14c.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, there are provided speaker covers 27 (thin plate members formed of punching metal) that cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state. .. As shown in FIG. 86, an upper plate 17 and a lower plate 50 are arranged below the window portion 14c so as to bulge toward the front side and arranged side by side vertically.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launch unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower plate 50 has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53, which is opened in the front-rear direction and guides the balls to the lower plate 50, is formed on the side surface of the lower plate 50 on the rear surface side.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to divide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 into a plurality of portions for storing the game balls, and to dispose the lower plate 50 and to have only one storage portion that is the upper plate 17 only. Is also good.

An operating device 300 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (a storage area for game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided at another portion such as the periphery of the lower tray 50 other than the upper tray 17, or may be provided at a plurality of locations, and is a push button type switch as an operation method. Alternatively, information may be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicating with the upper tray 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicating with the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145( 92)).

At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), there is formed a payout ball receiving portion 143 that projects rearward and is open upward. By partitioning 143 into the right and left by the partition wall 144, the passage inlet of the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and the passage inlet of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 are formed.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a part that forms a passage for discharging the game balls, which have not reached the game area, among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a, to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that is open upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) and is then discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17.

In addition, the foul ball passage portion 145 joins with the ball passage passage 147 (see FIG. 92) which is a passage for guiding the unfired balls flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 by the player performing the ball removing operation. Is formed as.

On the back side of the front frame 14, multi-function cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the upper left and right corners and bulge to the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multi-function cover members 171, 172, a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the electric decoration 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal substrate and one end of the electric decorations 8031, 8032 along the front frame 14. An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is disposed, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunction cover members 171 and 172.

In a portion of the front frame 14 covered with the multifunction cover members 171, 172, a wiring passage groove 14h communicating with the left and right electric decoration portions 8031, 8032, and an electric decoration portion 8031 passing through the wiring passage groove 14h, An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn rearward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. Be done.

Therefore, if the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the decorative portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the rear side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of FIG. 89). It is possible to easily insert and remove the connector of the wiring that conducts, and the connector of which one end is connected to the internal boards of the decorative portions 8031 and 8032 with respect to the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the turning front end side of the front frame 14 are arranged in a pair above and below the turning front end side of the inner frame 12, and a board surface supporting device 600 (for holding the base plate 60 of the game board 13 ( (See FIG. 126 ), the positional relationship is such that it is opposed to the front and rear of the upper device, and they can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but details will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member made of a resin material, the front side of which is open, is formed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and is formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 for accommodating the wiring is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a configuration in which the cross-sectional area becomes smaller as the front cover 14 moves from the rotation front end side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a forming the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring is The upper wall portion 173b, which is arranged in parallel with the lower side of the front frame 14 and faces the upper side of the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, is flush with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140. Composed of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173a. An upper extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be curved semi-circularly in the opposite direction is secured from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (a wave shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c. It is projected to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring in the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and thus it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

On the rear side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (a portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14a, which is the front frame. An inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178, which is a portion formed of a resin material and is opened downward, is provided between the vertically long plate portion on the side of the rotation base end of 14 and formed of a resin material.

The reverse cup portion 178, for example, illegally spreads the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserts a piano wire from near the lower hinge 18, and enters a game area to take measures against fraudulent acts. Is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, when the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of the resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts which are caused by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire with a heated tip is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat can melt the reverse cup portion 178 and allow the reverse cup portion 178 to pass through. It also melts 173. Then, when the piano wire whose front end is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned off. Therefore, by detecting the disconnection of the wiring, , It is possible to make it easier to detect fraud.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the inverted cup portion 178 on the long cover 173 side is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abut (approach) with each other on the surface. Further, since the normal line of the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraud.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted from the gap forcibly opened to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted, the tip thereof is the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape matching the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire is It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Further, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire advances to the front end side of the rotation of the front frame 14 in the space below the lower wall portion 173a (moves in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force given to a person who commits an illegal act through the piano wire from increasing, so that, for example, the lower wall portion By arranging the detection device for detecting the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to easily find the person who commits the misconduct by discovering the misconduct before the escape of the person who commits the misconduct. ..

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the wrongdoing cannot discern it, so he assumes that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. .. Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the window 14c), the action of inserting the piano wire further deeply into the person who commits fraud (piano wire Can be done without the suspicion that the plugging in is not working). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the person who commits the misconduct realizes that the misconduct is discovered and tries to escape.

The detection device may be a device including a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK or may be arranged on the back side of the operation handle 51. In the case of being provided on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally provided on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the entry of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launch unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 is an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It is provided with a launch rail 730 for guiding the game ball so as to be emitted toward a region between them, and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one onto the launch rail 730. In this case, the supplied game balls are arranged on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launch unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and the left side of the firing rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole penetrating through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction. The dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 are opened toward the rear side so that one end can communicate with a through hole that penetrates the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end. A curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the vertical direction) is formed so that the end of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the balls delivered from the dispensing device 133 pass through the through holes of the inner frame 12, enter the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and are discharged from the other end. It

When the front frame 14 is closed, the payout ball receiving portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 is inserted into the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. A front door side upper tray passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage portion 161, and a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, a shutter 163 for restricting the outflow of the game balls from the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is provided in the lower portion of the tray passage forming member 160. .. The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position that narrows the outlet portions of both passages and blocks the outflow of the game balls, and an allowable position that allows the outflow of the game balls.

Further, a biasing member (coil spring or the like) for biasing the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12, the biasing member is biased. The shutter 163 remains in the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where the game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 or the main body side lower dish passage portion 162, the disadvantage that the storage balls will spill out is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the allowed position. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the flow of the game ball is reduced. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In the board 167, a part where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and a part where the connector CN3 is arranged are formed by different boards. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control unit 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the voice lamp control unit 113. This is due to the intention of preventing malfunction in advance.

The portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members arranged below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled, and FIG. 92 is a window part of the front frame 14. 14C is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are disassembled and shown. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14c, on the front side of the upper plate 17, and on the diagonally upper right of the lower plate 50. The operation device 300 is arranged at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and the covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the operation device 300.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship of covering the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width that is approximately the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illumination portions 8031 and 8032.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least on the left and right ends, and a main body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right center portions project to the front side, and the main body bending portion 371. The body 371 extends downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left-right center portion of the portion 371 and the left-right direction end portion, joins at the extension lower end, and is seen in front view V A hanging portion 372 configured in a V shape, a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and the main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372. A light transmitting portion 373 fastened and fixed to at least one of them, a left flat support portion 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and a flat surface formed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371. A right side flat surface support portion 375 and a right side flat surface support portion 375, which is a groove recessed from the back side and whose recess width increases toward the back side (tapered). Prepare for

The main body curved portion 371 has a rounded curved shape on the front side edge, and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper plate 17 as a back side edge and is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The rear left edge portion 371a that abuts the front side edge of the front and rear direction 17 in the front-rear direction, and the rear left edge portion 371a that is connected to the rear left edge portion 371a and has a shape matching the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300. A rear middle edge portion 371b that abuts the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a shape that is continuous with the rear middle edge portion 371b on the opposite side of the rear left edge portion 371a and matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation portion 40. Mainly provided is a back surface right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball rental operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging part 372 is a plate part that covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body curved part 371, and is a plate part that supports the operation handle 51, and is provided between the right corner cover 380 that is arranged in the right corner part of the front frame 14. This is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by having a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). In the hanging portion 372, at a position on the front side of a later-described recessed portion 15a, a screw inserted from below is screwed into a bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed. It is fastened and fixed to the formed bottom plate.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion that allows light emitted from the operating device 300 to be transmitted to the front side and can be rendered by light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320 are disposed close to each other.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is a matter that is arbitrarily determined, and in the present embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are 6 LEDs that emit light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e) and 2 LEDs that emit light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , Respectively.

Light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in the LED device 341f passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373. To do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32 ), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310, and then is transmitted. Pass through section 373.

Therefore, for example, when the light amount of the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the light amount of the light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 is smaller than that when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Then, it becomes stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the light amount of the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the light amount), and according to the state change of the tilting device 310. It is possible to perform an effect of changing the amount of visible light through the light transmitting portion 373.

Further, as another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the light amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in accordance with the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed strongly (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 moves to the first state. By controlling the amount of light to be weakly (stepwise) changed in accordance with the change from the 1st state to the 2nd state, the light visible through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change of the state of the tilting device 310 is detected. It is possible to reduce the degree of change in the light amount of (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

In the assembled state (FIG. 86 ), the left-side plane support portion 374 is in contact with the lower end of the decorative portion 8031 vertically. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination portion 8031 and the illumination portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat support portion 374 toward the illumination portion 8031. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the illumination portion 8031.

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right flat surface support portion 375 is in contact with the lower end of the decorative portion 8032 vertically. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination portion 8032 and the illumination portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right flat surface support portion 375 toward the illumination portion 8032. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the illumination portion 8032.

Note that, although details will be described later, the illumination portion 8031 and the illumination portion 8032 come into contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, from the illumination portions 8031 and 8032. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the decorative portion 8031, the decorative portion 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be distributed over a wide range.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end of the decorative portion 8032 from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration portion 8032 is in the state of entering the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end portion of the electric decoration portion 8032 and the front side end portion of the right flat surface support portion 375 are formed. The positions of and match.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illumination portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the decorative portion 8032 with the engagement relationship described later, the covering state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the decorative portion 8032 to the body frame 14a, respectively. It is possible to eliminate the need for a separate fixing portion that fastens the covering cover 370 and the decorative portion 8032 to each other.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-shaped plate member 14d on the back surface of the body frame 14a is provided on the body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) provided on the front side of the body frame 14a. Is fastened and fixed to the members constituting the main body frame 14a), and the passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the rear side of the plate member 14d. The metal plate-shaped sheet metal member 150 is fastened and fixed to another member (such as the member constituting the upper plate 17) by sandwiching the main body frame 14a, and covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (a member forming the upper plate 17 or the like) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

The sheet metal member 150 has a front frame even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a wire or piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted). It functions as an entry preventing member that prevents entry from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, the metal plate member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire whose end is heated is pressed, and it is possible to prevent the illustrated wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. ..

The sheet metal member 150 is formed in such a manner as to cover the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 in the front view left side, and the opened front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 that is fitted to the 140, and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 that covers the back surface of the lower part of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door-side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower and upper portions of the foul ball passage portion 145 in the vertical direction, the lower end portion of the front door-side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of 145, but also when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the left-right direction or the vertical direction, the illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. It can be prevented.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back surfaces of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball passage passage 147, when the wire illustrated in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to open a through hole. However, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, the operating device 300 is removed, and accordingly, the wire illustrated is pressed against a portion where the front and rear thickness is thin (a portion obliquely above and behind the recess 15a). As a result, a case where the through hole is opened and the illustrated wire enters is illustrated.

Further, the front frame 14 is provided with an operation portion rear member 155 that is fastened from the rear side to the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140, and the operation portion rear member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 arranged in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the above position.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation portion back surface member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs that are formed in the front-rear direction mainly from the outer edge of the left and right elongated plate member. The through hole 156 is formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can penetrate therethrough, and the through holes 156 are formed above and below the through hole 156, and the screw for fastening and fixing the operation portion rear surface member 155 is inserted into the body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 vertically formed in a portion (left end portion) overlapped with the rear surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end more than the through hole 156. And an opening/closing restricting portion 159 that protrudes to the rear side on the side.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to match the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction and is provided on the rear side. A projecting portion 148a, and a screw insertion portion 148b formed as a hole into which a screw inserted in the connection insertion hole 158 can be screwed at a position matching the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare mainly.

With this configuration, when the operation portion back surface member 155 is placed on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operation portion rear surface can be formed by passing the protruding portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158. The operation portion rear surface member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140 by aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw passing through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screw insertion portion 148b. be able to.

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion rear surface member 155 having the connecting insertion hole 158 and the lower edge thereof at a right angle. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to define a region, and the extending wall portion thereof. In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the 148c is formed in an L-shape capable of contacting the wall portion 158a vertically and horizontally.

Therefore, in order to align the operation portion rear surface member 155 with the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved up and down with respect to the extended wall portion 148c. By contacting the left and right surfaces, the position and posture of the operation portion back surface member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion which is arranged to face the front and back of the board surface supporting device 600 (see FIG. 90) arranged in the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). Under a predetermined condition, the front surface frame 14 is brought into contact with the board surface supporting device 600 or the game board 13 to exert an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that extends toward the rear surface side of the operation portion rear surface member 155 and is made of synthetic resin, and is a cross-section viewed in the extending direction to ensure rigidity. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required while securing rigidity compared to when it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped opening. Can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of other portions of the operation portion back surface member 155 (for example, the strength may depend on the main body frame 14a, so that there is no problem even if the strength is low. Since it can be formed with a plate thickness), it is possible to improve the formability and secure the strength of the opening/closing restriction portion 159.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as it can ensure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, a curved (wave)-shaped cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wavy cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used as compared with a flat cross section.

Further, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not provided as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155 but is bent and extends from the main body frame 14a to the rear surface side, or from another member fixed to the rear surface side of the main body frame 14a to the rear surface side. You may comprise from the metal part extended to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is made of synthetic resin, the board surface supporting device 600 can be formed when it comes into contact with the board surface supporting device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. It is possible to prevent chipping or denting. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that an operator who changes the state of the board surface supporting device 600 and attaches/detaches the game board 13 to the chip surface supporting device 600 is injured by touching a chip or a dent.

Here, since the opening/closing restriction portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock arranged further to the rotation front end side. It is possible to secure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, in a state in which the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface supporting device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 or the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotating front end side is accidentally locked. it can.

As a path for allowing foreign matter such as wire to enter, for example, a path that passes through the gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured so that it can be separated as a whole to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the operation device 300 follows the gap.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies power to the operating device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. The harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign material such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 that is connected to the outside of the operation device 300 having a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as wire from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

Liquid may be considered as the foreign matter that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels uncomfortable with the game result may sprinkle drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At that time, the operation device 300 at a convenient position is likely to be a prey to which drinking water is applied, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) or the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) fails. May occur.

Furthermore, if liquid such as drinking water enters the back of the main body frame 14a, the electronic board or the like may be damaged. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it has a separable and independent structure, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water applied to the operating device 300 from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

The bottom plate upper surface of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300) is provided with a recessed portion 15a having a T-shape in a top view. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion. It does not have a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, refer to FIG. 13, the transmission holes 321a and the openings 325 correspond to the gaps), pass through the inside of the operation device 300, and go downward of the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is arranged near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)), and is further connected to wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor housing portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is supplied to the drive motor 342. It can be applied directly to prevent breakdown.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, liquid such as drinking water may be splashed, but since the other portion is covered by the bottom plate portion 321, the voice coil motor 352 is not affected by drinking water or the like. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows down to the front side downward due to the inclination of the vibrating surface of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player returning home is splashed with liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play a game as long as he wipes the touching part of the upper surface of the operation device 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from pressing business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d at the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. 93 to 96, the state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 is illustrated as in FIG. 91.

FIG. 93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which a released state and a fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are illustrated side by side. is there. In FIG. 93B, the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The bundling movable member 180 is a member that is in a fixed state in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are extended leftward from the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are connected to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable members 180, respectively.

On the other hand, the harness connected to each of the illumination parts 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300 or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) is a relay board once disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. Are connected (assembled) to each other, a bundle of extension harnesses HN3 heads to the binding movable member 180 from the relay board, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The bundling movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotatable about a body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm 182 that is rotatably supported, and one side surface of the movable arm 182 in the direction of rotation along the lower edge of the movable arm 182 (the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the other side surface of the movable arm 182, and the other side surface of the movable arm 182 in the rotation direction (the side opposite to the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions when viewed from above and which can lock the binding arm portions 183. A temporary fixing portion 185 that extends downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and has an opening is mainly provided.

In addition, the binding movable member 180 is formed such that the binding arm 183 has high flexibility, while the other portions are at least less flexible (highly rigid) than the binding arm 183.

The main body portion 181 has a fixed portion 181a having a cross-section with an upper side having a substantially horseshoe shape and having a through hole through which a screw is inserted in the center, and right and left lower corners of the fixed portion 181a protrude from the plate member 14d side, respectively. A pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b provided and an intermediate stop portion that extends downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and has its extended tip curved close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d (see FIG. 96(a)) extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a, and a portion disposed above the support plate portion 181d. And a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

The plate member 14d is provided with a hole group 14d1 formed at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, the through hole having an arrangement corresponding to the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation stopping portions 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of rotation preventing convex portions 181b should be fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thus, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and it is possible to determine the posture of the binding movable member 180 with respect to the plate member 14d at the time of fixing.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between itself and the plate member 14d. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from sliding down by narrowing the gap between the extended end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, and the center of the harness HN1 to HN3 on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area is secured for the region (the region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stop portion 181c) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a flat surface that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181e has its outer peripheral surface fitted inward at the base end side portion of the movable arm portion 182, so that the movable arm portion 182 is fixed. The shaft is supported (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion which is a portion externally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e and which is a base end portion which is smoothly connected to the plane OS1 which is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape and continuously provided on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivotal support position.

The base end portion 182a includes left and right end portions (portions in which a straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and a rear side end portion (the plane OS1 and the outermost portion of the outer circumference of the cylindrical shape portion fitted to the cylindrical fastening portion 181e). Side walls in the rotation direction are respectively extended from the approaching portions). The respective side walls are formed in an arc shape in which the centers of the radii of curvature are arranged on the same side, and the distance between them is gradually shortened as they approach the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b is formed. It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the rigidity of the base end portion 182a is maintained higher than that of the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end 182a is designed with a design concept that does not intend elastic deformation (high rigidity), and the thin plate part 182b is designed with a design concept intended elastic deformation (low rigidity) depending on the situation. ..

Since the pair of binding arms 183 are configured to have the same shape, only one will be described and the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, a small width portion 183a formed with a width equal to the width of the root near the tip portion and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a are alternately arranged at equal intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into a through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have a thickness slightly larger than that of the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 is formed on the side of the large opening 184a formed on the movable arm 182 side and on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 across the large opening 184a, and has an opening width larger than that of the large opening 184a. A small small opening 184b is mainly provided (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass. The large width portion 183b has a size such that it cannot pass (lock).

According to the present embodiment, the binding arm 183 is arranged on the side of the large opening 184a (on the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 becomes smaller) when it is desired to move the binding arm 183 relative to the locking portion 184. By arranging the binding arm portion 183 on the side of the small opening 184b when it is desired to lock the binding arm portion 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted. Can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole at the center thereof, through which a binding band can be inserted. Even when the binding arms 183 are broken due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, by inserting and fixing a commercially available binding band into the through holes of the temporary fixing portions 185. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bound together.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb of FIG. 94(a). 95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95(b) is a front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG.

94(a) and 94(b), the state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range) is shown, and FIGS. 95(a) and 95( In b), the movable arm 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically elongated metal portion forming the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing the up-down direction). This angle is normally used in view of the installation situation of the pachinko machine 8010 at the amusement store (a situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side on the left and right and may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010 when rotated by 90 degrees or more). This is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, in normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and exceeds the range in which the movable arm 182 can rotate with respect to the main body 181 (range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since the movable arm 182 is absent, it is possible to reduce the risk that the movable arm 182 is deteriorated by elastic deformation and is broken.

Next, the support mode of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally pinched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being disconnected.

96(a) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a). FIG. 96C is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96D is a schematic top view of FIG. 96C.

96(a) and 96(b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is arranged at a position moved to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 from an opening opened leftward at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c. It That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c is the same, it is extended from the upper extending wall 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and can be supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm portion 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c. ~HN3 can be made to conform to the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d), the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have curved shapes, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation.

Further, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arms 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, particularly in the state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Thereby, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. is there. Note that FIG. 97(a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

97(a) and 97(b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematic. The members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines in phantom lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also centered on the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12 like the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b), the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 is rotated about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since it corresponds to opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 96 ( b) and also FIG. 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 have the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the opened/closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a path passing near a vertically long metal part (a part where the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 abuts in FIG. 96(d)) forming the left side part of the frame 14a. That is, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from approaching the pivoting front end side of the front frame 14 by routing the harnesses HN1 to HN3 so as to bypass them.

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the worker during the work performed by opening and closing the front frame 14, and at the same time, the harness HN1 to HN3 when the front frame 14 is closed ( It is possible to improve the extent to which the pivotal base end is bent only once (see FIGS. 96(b) and 97(a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). According to the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of the wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. As a result, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 and melted to penetrate the wire, and the wire is advanced to the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stopper 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out, and conduction is disabled.

When the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are disconnected, the injustice can be quickly detected by controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (display an error screen). .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be fired even by rotating the operation handle 51. Disappear. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraudulent activity is discovered after the fraudulent activity is performed (the fraudulent activity can be detected early).

In this case, after inserting the wire into the game area and playing around with the game area (for example, after bending the nails to make it easier to illegally win a prize), the ball is placed in the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. Since it is possible to disable the firing of a ball to a person who engages in an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent giving an illegal profit. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to perform a specific wrongdoing.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 burns out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is performed. The operation of 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, there is a possibility that a person who commits fraud may not be able to collect the bills inserted in the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the balance of the card due to the fraudulent activity. Therefore, it is possible to exert deterrence against cheating.

Furthermore, in the case of fraudulent acts by eliminating the possibility that banknotes inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or balls corresponding to the balance of the card cannot be collected, the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit) is 0 yen, since the cheating is performed without leaving the seat, the gaming machine store side can easily notice the cheating.

In the first place, if the harness HN2 is disconnected, the disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output. At the gaming machine store, check the disconnection error (CR error). By doing so, the possibility of fraud can be easily grasped.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. Note that, in FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end of the front-door-side lower dish passage portion 142 occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 in the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. The lower end portion of is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area (area of about 1/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) in the right part of the ball guide opening 53.

The front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages that extend from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the balls can flow down toward the lower tray 50. And S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 whose extension direction is directed (switched) at least once to the left and right sides respectively.

The S-shaped path SL1 allows the passage length of the front door-side lower tray passage portion 142 to be increased while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the passage is retained inside the front door-side lower tray passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. This makes it possible to increase the number of spheres that can be retained on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86), so that the vertical dimensions of the game area and the effect area can be increased. Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed in the lower plate 50 (and its upstream side), the stress of ball replenishment given to the player (when there are no balls in the lower plate 50 minutes, the balls can be removed from the thousand boxes). It is possible to configure the pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress due to the requirement for replenishment or the like.

The front door-side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are provided with bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2, respectively, which are regions in which the extending direction can be bent in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. With features. That is, the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 is provided with the first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and the second bending region on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1 with the right and left of the characteristic portion reversed. And a region NEa2.

In addition, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEb2 on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 in which the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed. , Is provided. In the description of the characteristic portion, the characteristic of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending area NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, among the left and right side walls of the front door-side lower dish passage portion 142, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side of the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends in the left and right direction. , A ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting with the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extended end. The adjacent walls Nc, Nc, and Nc are mainly provided, and each of the walls Na, Nb, and Nc is extended from the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The surface Nc1 of the proximity wall Nc functions as a guide surface for the sphere because the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb is formed by being curved along the S-shaped path SL1. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the wire HM (wire or a thin metal typified by a piano wire) that has been illegally inserted. Function as a surface to be processed, which will be described later in detail. The proximity wall Nc is set so that the gap Nin between the side wall Na at the extended lower end is larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the incorrectly inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, a path that advances toward the upstream side of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance can be considered as an entry path of the wire HM that is illegally inserted. The person who commits the wrongdoing advances the wire HM while pressing it against the side wall of the front-door-side lower dish passage portion 142.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who commits cheating, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, while the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in the case, the wire HM moves rightward by the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 so as to be laterally reversed, the wire HM can be inserted into the gap Nin without omission.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when it enters the gap Nin. The tip position of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters the tapered dead end formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (sandwiched) here, it is possible to prevent further progress of the wire HM, and it is possible to prevent the wire HM from being held, and to detect fraud promptly. it can.

On the other hand, even when the wire HM does not get caught and further advances, when the wire HM overhangs from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM overhangs so that the wire HM is advanced further. Even if it does, the tip of the wire HM will move downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the game area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area to cause the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). It is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit by obtaining an illegal payout ball by forcibly opening a movable device such as to make it easy to illegally win a prize.

It returns to FIG. 98 and demonstrates. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of a portion downstream from the confluence region CE that joins the ball passage passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (twice or more in the present embodiment). As a result, when the spheres flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are arranged in the merging area CE, the spheres flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the merging passage CE (the spheres simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility that the balls are caught by the upper and lower wall portions can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the downward flow of the spheres from being obstructed in the downstream portion from the merge area CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a which is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and which vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The passage portion 145a is set such that the left-right width thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the rear-side bottom plate portion of the passage-forming unit 140 is formed so as to project toward the front side as it goes downward.

In a region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is in a surface position with an upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in a region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 is located. The bottom plate portion on the back side is positioned on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a.

That is, in the foul ball passage portion 145, the front-rear width of the upstream region of the passage portion 145a is set larger than that of the downstream region of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set such that the front-rear width is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front-back width of the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to be slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when the balls are retained in the foul ball passage portion 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged at positions upstream and rearward of the passage portion 145, so that the number of retainable balls can be increased, and Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (slightly shifted to the left, right, up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from simultaneously entering the passage portion 145a.

In other words, the entry of the balls into the passage portion 145a can be regulated one by one. Accordingly, even if two or more foul balls continuously flow into the foul ball passage portion 145, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the merging region CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being caught between the upper and lower wall portions and engaging with each other.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow lower surface of the ball faces rightward. From the back side bottom plate of the passage forming unit 140 below the slant plate 146a, the slant plate 146a that is slanted downwardly, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball socket 146 below the slant plate 146a. A curved guide plate portion 146c is mainly provided, which extends in a plate shape toward the rear surface side and is curved in a manner that the extending direction is directed upward toward the rear surface side.

While the sphere is guided to the foul ball passage 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate part 146c, the foul ball receiving part 146 is moved to the front side by the action of the inclined plate part 146a and the closing part 146b. The passing position of the ball passing through can be brought close to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball that rolls down on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the blocking portion 146b prevents the ball from passing the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. You can

This makes it possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion on the S-shaped path SL2 can be reduced. While the width of 145 is set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can smoothly flow down.

In the foul ball passage portion 145, the passage width is set to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a). It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure on the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. It should be noted that FIGS. 100 and 101 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 forming the electric decoration portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit that is formed to be long in the left and right, and the left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration portion 8031 and the electric decoration portion 8032. In this lower support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back surface side to the front surface side is provided at the lower end portion of the right end portion of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (See FIG. 118) is formed, and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted into the left and right claws that form the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

Accordingly, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 do not need to be directly fastened and fixed, but can be coupled and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400 defines the order in which the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed, and then the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500, which are divided into the left and right, are provided with the left and right claws that form the supported groove 417. With the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, on the front side of the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) in the front and back, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are the main body frame. The state disassembled from 14a is shown.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is provided in the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. A columnar fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening portion 14e1 includes a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side, and the upper frame is fastened by fastening the screw passing through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410. This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIG. 104 illustrates a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into an insertion hole formed in the body frame 14a, is disassembled from the body frame 14a. The upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are not shown, while the cover cover 370 is shown as a reference.

The cover assembly 370 is assembled in the body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled in the body frame 14a as an actual assembly procedure. Further, in the right panel unit 500, the right side wall portion forms the right side edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIGS. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 is a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 is a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIG. 105 to FIG. 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left weight plate unit 500L and a right weight plate unit 500R that are stacked in the left-right direction, and the weight plate units 500L and 500R that are fastened and fixed together with the main body frame. 14a (see FIG. 104) and a vertically long plate-like support plate portion 510 that is fastened and fixed.

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws that are inserted into the support plate portion 510 from the rear surface side to the front surface side. In this state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the rear surface side. It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-shaped extending portion 511a from the outer edge (right side edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side, and at the same time, the support plate portion 510 is in the assembled state. In FIG. 86, the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and the substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511. A plurality of cover side through holes 513 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and A pin support hole 515 formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514 is mainly provided.

The fixing plate 511 has a shape overlapping with the board member 512 in a front view, and a board member 512 side portion includes a base portion 511b that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side, and the base member 511b faces the front surface of the base material member 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b can contact the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)). Can be prevented from falling. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extension portion 511a is displaced to the right by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 rather than the base portion 511b, and thus the front side of the extension portion 511a. While the outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, the left side surface of the fixed plate 511 is formed up to the rear side end portion as a surface that is substantially flush with the side surface of the base portion 511b. The rear end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the rear end of the support plate 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 has the support plate 510. A left side surface 511c.

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on the front side of which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged adjacent to each other at a predetermined interval (in the present embodiment, an interval of 11 [mm]) in a row that curves in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540. .. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape where the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes of the LEDs 512a are parallel to each other from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed to be longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak. The light enters the light guide member 540 and is emitted from either surface of the light guide member 540. The entrance and exit of light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and inserting a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 from the back surface side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening a screw to the rear surface fastening portion 527.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 arranged on the outer lens member 550 and inserting a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 from the back surface side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening a screw to the back surface fastening portion 556.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole into which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 has a left-right width set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a top-bottom width is set to be about twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate 510 and fastened and fixed, while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the support plate unit 510 in the fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate unit 510 from the front side (the protrusion 566). Even when the position is vertically displaced by about the diameter of the above), the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. As a result, the protrusion 566 is inserted into the pin support hole 515, and then the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are moved up and down with respect to the support plate 510 by an amount corresponding to the positional deviation, thereby eliminating the positional deviation and easily fastening. Fixation can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left weight plate unit 500L constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86), and an inner cover member 520 formed of a resin material that does not transmit light, and its inner cover member 520. And an inner lens member 530 which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right weight plate unit 500R faces the light guide member 540 that faces the left weight plate unit 500L, and abuts the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction. An outer lens member 550 formed of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 which are arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and are formed of a non-transparent resin material. An outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed is mainly provided.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 110, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 111, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown, respectively, and five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are shown. Is disassembled and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 arranged at an upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. A lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the body plate portion 521, and an inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and are formed to be longer than the short fastening portions 525. A plurality of long fastening portions 526 that are screwed into the inner cover member 520 for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520, and project from the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear surface fastening portions 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The front side end 521a of the main body plate 521 has a wavy shape, and a connecting plate 521c that connects the front side end 521a and the back side base 521b at a short width portion (a portion closer to the back side) of the wavy shape. Equipped with.

The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that abuts (matches the shape) with the left side surface of the base 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged in a posture that it is inclined to the left as it goes toward the back side, and the connecting plate portion 521c defines the opening 524.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged such that the intervals gradually increase from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the effect effect by light can be made different for each opening 524.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, and the left outer surface is recessed in the left-right direction. And a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions of the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a that is a cylindrical portion into which a screw that fastens and fixes the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b that is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by inserting screws at two locations at the upper end and one location at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions that form the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The opening portions 524 are arranged in parallel at four positions in the upper and lower sides and function as windows for visually recognizing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape that projects rightward with the connecting plate 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged so as to be recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at a boundary portion between the back surface side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design of the present embodiment, where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 projects to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the rear-side base portion 521b has a design shape and is concavely curved rightward between the above-described boundary portions. That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates left and right as it goes up and down.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion projecting to the design surface side. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, a recess that tends to become a dead space is formed on the back surface of the design-like protruding portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by disposing the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back surface side of the inner cover member 520 (the inner lens member 530 side). The efficiency can be improved.

The inner lens member 530 is formed such that the shape of the front and rear ends thereof follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a corrugated shape in which the front end 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically long plate shape substantially matches the shape of the front end 521a of the inner cover member 520. To be done.

The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is bored in the front-rear direction at a switching position in the front-rear direction of a curve forming a wave shape. In addition, it is provided with support holes 531b and 531c through which the protruding portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in a corrugated front portion of the front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b can be prevented from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

The support hole 531c is formed in a wave-shaped rearward portion of the front end 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the support hole 531c can contact the light guide member 540 is disposed on the back side thereof. .. That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531c. be able to.

In addition, the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d formed in the left-right direction at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the up-down direction and having a size capable of inserting the long fastening portion 526. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned with each other.

The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and has a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from the upper and lower edge portions of the connecting plate portion 521c. And a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that vertically connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended to fill a gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a. That is, since the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes leftward as it goes to the back side, like the inner cover member 520, the shape in which the left and right width becomes longer as it goes to the back side (the front end portion in top view). It has a triangular shape with a tip.

The inner lens member 530 includes a projecting portion 533 formed by projecting leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the overhanging side, the light scattering portion 533a having a wavy convex shape and having a wavy curved surface formed to scatter light.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and is formed as a halftone dot pattern in which concave portions that change the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right are formed on the left and right side surfaces as a halftone dot pattern. The so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512 a to the end portion on the back surface side of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540 and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. It The light guide member 540 is heat-bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed in a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for converting light from a so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in this embodiment) into uniform surface emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512 a and emits the light from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is formed of a thermoplastic template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm are arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) the resin. Of the light emitted from the LEDs 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but one having transparency is preferable, and acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), polycarbonate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, amorphous polyester resin, amorphous olefin resin is used. Examples thereof include resins, polystyrene resins, and AS resins (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compounds). Among these, particularly by using the acrylic resin, it is possible to obtain the light guide member 540 having a high average brightness and a small decrease in the brightness distribution.

In the present embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the end portion on the LED 512a side is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, it is possible to efficiently guide the light from the LED 512a, improve the shape retention after thermal bending, and obtain practical strength.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wavy shape in which the shape of the front end portion is slightly displaced to the back side from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530, and the light guide member 540 is laterally displaced. Is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

The right and left corrugations are not strict in the present invention. The degree of corrugation is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in the curved surface portion. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design in which distortion after heat bending is small and practical mechanical properties are kept good, and three-dimensional freedom can be imparted. ..

It should be noted that, although the details of the corrugated shape that undulates left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114 ), the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520 is located to the left and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. The corrugated shape is positioned to the right at a position between the positions (positioned away from the inner cover member 520).

The corrugated shape in the left-right direction is formed by heat-bending the base material on which the concave portions are formed, as described above. As the method of hot bending of the present invention, a metal having a curved concave surface (female type) and convex surface (male type) in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + a heating temperature of 10 to 40° C. It is made by pressing the base material against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110°C or higher and 150°C or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load +40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light source light is before and after the heat bending process. It is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the reflection angle of the. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in brightness and uneven brightness distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such a heating temperature condition, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 has a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 forming a light guide plate, and screws extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560. And a fastening portion 542 that is formed.

The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at a position other than the fastening portion 542 and the recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate having no holes at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the effect produced by the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is disposed in the upper and lower end portions of the main body plate portion 551, which are vertically formed in a long plate shape, and the fastening portions 542 of the light guide member 540 are internally fitted and supported. The inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which the screws to be fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 juts out to the right to form an outer cover. A protruding portion 554 visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portions 526 of the inner cover member 520 are inserted, and a protruding portion provided on the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back surface fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed such that the front and rear end portions of the outer lens member 550 follow the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front end 551a extending leftward from the front edge of the main body plate 551 and forming a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front end of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a wavy shape, and is disposed with a slight displacement on the front side with respect to the front end of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. It

The front-side end portion 551a is provided with a convex shape on the front side at a switching position in the front-rear direction of the curve forming the corrugated shape, and a plurality of convex portions that are fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The installation portion 551b is provided.

A bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) that bulges in a semicircular shape in a side view is vertically provided on the surface of the front end 551a opposite to the side opposite to the light guide member 540. It is formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions so as to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at a predetermined distance, The light emission on the front end face can be a strip-shaped light emission mode that is vertically continuous.

The insertion hole 553 is provided in a recessed deep portion that is recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the protruding portion 554. Accordingly, the outer lens member 550 can be firmly fastened to the outer cover member 560, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the back surface fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550, and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the arrangement of the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right side edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer side edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). it can). As a result, the area (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) arranged to face the player can be enlarged.

The body plate 551 has a surface on the side facing the light guide member 540 that is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The surface 540 and the main body plate 551 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 114(b)).

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 faces the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned with each other via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 from being displaced from the light guide member 540, and the light is accurately incident on the light guide member 540 from the LED 512a. Can be made.

The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape and a receiving surface at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561 that can receive the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520. There is a plurality of holes having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a long hole formed in an oval shape having a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and the screw is inserted from the opposite side. The upper fastening target portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 are receiving surfaces capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastening portion 563 having a screw receiving portion 563a, which is formed in the shape of an elongated hole having a slightly larger vertical width and a lateral width longer than the vertical width, and through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561. Is a receiving surface that is capable of receiving the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 at the front-side end portion thereof, and has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and its vertical width. And a plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. An opening 565 and a plurality of protrusions 566 protruding from the body plate 561 to the back side are mainly provided.

The upper fastening target portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions of the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower tightened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions that form the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts the upper panel unit 400 and the cover cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86 ), the cover panel 370 has a shape in which the right panel unit 500 projects to the front side. However, it is possible to stably support the upper panel unit 400 by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening portion 565 is formed in a shape into which the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 in the left-right direction can be narrowed, and thus fraudulent act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

With reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, a method of assembling the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R will be described. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113A is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113A.

Note that FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b) show a state in which the protruding portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and in FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), the protruding portion 551b is provided. The state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left weight plate unit 500L and the left side end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right weight plate unit 500R are abutted in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112(b)). ), the left weight plate unit 500L is brought closer to the right weight plate unit 500R from the front side, and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the protruding parts 551b and 551c are inserted into the supporting holes 531b and fitted to each other, whereby the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above-described configuration, the left-side heavy plate unit 500L and the right-side heavy plate unit 500R are arranged at the front-side end portion of the right panel unit (front side rather than the front side surface of the light guide member 540). Since it is possible to reduce the number of screws for fastening and fixing the light, it is possible to reduce a region where the light is blocked by the screws, so that the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is spread in the vertical direction. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the shape of a band.

In addition, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that the guide plate is mistakenly introduced at the time of fastening. It is possible to reduce a range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged by applying a load to the optical member 540. Therefore, it is possible to expand the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered tip). This can prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left weight plate unit 500L is brought closer to the front side of the right weight plate unit 500R and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, when the left weight plate unit 500L is slanted with the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530. The light guide member 540 of the right weight plate unit 500R constitutes surfaces that are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship in which they can contact each other. That is, since the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the left heavy plate unit 500L in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R, The panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing, respectively, and there are at least two possible assembly procedures. ..

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R to each other, and then fastening and fixing the same to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right weight plate unit 500R. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, then the left weight plate unit 500L is brought close to the right weight plate unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left weight plate unit 500L is right weighted. This is a method of fastening and fixing the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. Then, these two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

As described above, since the assembly and the disassembly can be performed by the two procedures, the operator who performs the maintenance or the like disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 by the procedure of the part where the replacement is required. It is possible to select whether or not to reduce the work time.

Whichever procedure is used for disassembling, in order to disassemble the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R, the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R are slid in the plane direction. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the protruding portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. Then, when the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R are slid on each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

As described above, the configuration in which the protruding portions 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted to each other is such that the right panel unit 500 is pry open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). This helps prevent fraudulent acts that enter the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of 500.

That is, when fixing the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 by fastening the screw, by removing the screw, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled and fraud can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are attached to the front surface. The left panel unit 500L and the right panel unit 500R are difficult to disassemble unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), so that the right panel unit 500 is viewed from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act that enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 along the inside of the right panel unit 500.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. .. In addition, in FIGS. 114A to 114C, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

Light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is irradiated to the light guide member 540 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in any direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114B), light is condensed on the side where the concave shape is formed and light is diffused on the side where the convex shape is formed. For example, in the light guide member 540, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the side of the opening 524 (left side) at a position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524. Light emitted from the light member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, at the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, from the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side. The light emitted to can be diffused and used for production.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode (whether the light is condensed or diffused) of the light effect performed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as a boundary. It can be provided, and the effect of production can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production does not occur only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are illustrated. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 into regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 into regions, the manner of producing light on both the left and right sides can be made different. ..

The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes corresponding to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the second opening from the top, as the vertical width increases as the openings 524 move upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is smaller. , Radius of curvature R2 is made shorter (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even when there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light is different for each opening 524, so that the LEDs can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of the emitted light can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of visible light in the upper opening 524 can be larger than that in the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, that is, the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface. The normal line that comes out of the shape is slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be strengthened, the effect of the light can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the opening 524 at the bottom can be directed to the player's eyes. It can be emitted upward.

The upper and lower widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as the length connecting the midpoint of the upper side of the opening 524 and the midpoint of the lower side in a side view, as shown in FIG. 114(c). The width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion having the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion having the radius of curvature R2 to the vertical width W2, and the width of the portion having the radius of curvature R3. The width of the opening 524 arranged to face each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion having the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, the lower opening 524 of each opening 524 is formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portion of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the size relation of the curvature radii R1 to R3 is related to the size relation of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524. As a result, the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased at a portion where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, the portion having the radius of curvature R1) so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light collection is performed. In a portion where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent light from excessively entering the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to make the light emitting modes of the openings 524 uniform.

The center points of the respective radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114(b) are points corresponding to the focal point of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. Is arranged at a substantially intermediate position.

The light guide member 540 has a leftward convex shape in the region KE of the boundary of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is a band-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacently above the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE adjacently below the opening 524. Matches the top edge of. Therefore, the light emitted in the front-rear direction from the LED 512a advances to the region KE while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114(c)).

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that the player can visually recognize the light even if the light condensing action is reduced. The difference in the amount of light is small.

On the other hand, by making the region KE convex rather than flat on the left side, the light guide member 540 can be formed to have a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. Therefore, the light guide member 540 can be prevented. The durability of can be improved.

Further, by making the region KE convex to the left, it is possible to form a concave to the right, and a part where the light is diffused and a part where the light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to change the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing the change of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. ..

For example, it is possible to irradiate light inside the openings 524 and 565 without any gaps by turning off the LEDs 512a that cause light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a. At this time, since the right side shape of the light guide member 540 is a concave shape above and below the area KE, the light emitted from the upper and lower positions of the area KE to the right intersects with the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being viewed darkly in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emission mode of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

Note that the light guide member 540 may be formed as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a strip shape. Can be made.

In the area KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. You may perform an effect using the light which reaches this front end part.

That is, an effect of light that is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c but visible through the front end 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared. However, by setting the jackpot expectation of the effect to be high, the position of the eyes of the player can be moved to a side farther from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree to which the player's eyes are tired can be reduced, and the player can play the game for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side surface, and is viewed by the player from the right side surface through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, a clerk who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and is not visually recognized by the player playing the pachinko machine 8010, and who is visually recognizing the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

This allows the clerk to carry out an error notification that the clerk can easily notice while the kidnapping player is not aware of it. Can be prevented.

It should be noted that, by reversing the right and left shapes of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115B is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115A.

The light guide member 540 is shaped so that it gradually tapers from the end surface (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. In addition, the maximum end portion on the front side of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the left and right width dimensions have the same gradient over the entire vertical region. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a side than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face becomes long, the width becomes thinner and the width becomes thinner. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is vertically sandwiched by the portion near the support hole 531b and is arranged at the position depressed toward the back side, the difference in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b are arranged. Due to the shadow formed by, the portion near the support hole 531c is more likely to be visually recognized darker than the portion near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end surface of the light guide member 540 facing the support hole 531c is smaller than the end surface of the light guide member 540 facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that emits light by receiving the light emitted from the LED 512a.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized near the support hole 531c is larger than the amount of light visually recognized near the support hole 531b. It is possible to reduce the difference in the distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkening due to the shadow. Accordingly, with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the forefront, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform in the vertical direction (the difference in strength is small). )can do.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. Note that, in FIG. 116, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is visible. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of the curved shape of the light guide member 540 and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It is spread and progresses to the outside.

On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curvedly formed. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate the light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant, the light emitting modes (rough and dense) can be different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540. In other words, the player can see the light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not directly beside the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved and formed as shown in FIG. 115(b). (Refer to the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115(b). The imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115(b) indicates an example of the traveling direction of the light passing through the light guide member 540). This makes it easier for the player to see the light, and can improve the effect of the light emission effect.

Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the upper end portion of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. The unit that is fitted to the front frame 14 and is supported from below is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed by sandwiching the speaker assembly 450 to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), and an upper frame member 410 and a front surface of the upper frame member 410. And a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the rear side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , Is mainly provided. Note that the speaker assembly 450 is not shown in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit that is decorated on the front side face to indicate the model name and the like, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The included LED emits light to produce a light effect.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmissive resin material, a corrugated wall portion 403 formed in a corrugated shape on a rear outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and the corrugated wall portion 403. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending in a laterally long plate shape from the lower edge to the back surface side, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 protruding cylindrically from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the back surface side and having a tubular shape inside. A tubular portion 405 having a shape penetrating the corrugated wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which the screws inserted in the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly.

The body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in which front and rear dish-shaped members are overlapped with their open sides, and a space is formed inside. The included LED is arranged on an electronic board, and the electronic board is fixed to the main body 402.

The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the horizontal mounting position, and the work of mounting the lighting unit 401 on the upper frame member 410. This is the part that improves the sex.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is a portion that is formed so as to be capable of contacting the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and that suppresses vertical displacement of the lighting unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. In addition, on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, a laterally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed as a recess.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a wiring through hole for passing the wiring of the electronic substrate on which the LED included in the main body portion 402 is arranged to the upper frame member 410 side.

The lighting unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space that encloses the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side frame member 14e and the upper side plate member 14e, and access to the inside is possible. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the lighting unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the body member 411. , A left corner support member 430L that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and a back side of the main body member 411 that extends from the opening 414 to the front side. The lens member 440 that is inserted and is pressed by the right-corner support member 430R from the back surface side is restricted from falling off to the back surface side, and at the same time, the lens member 440 that configures the illumination portion 8033.

The main body member 411 is an elongated member that has openings formed on both the left and right sides through which vibration waves (voices) generated from the speaker assembly 450 pass, and the speaker cover 27 is disposed so as to cover the openings. Then, on the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape in a top view, and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 that is arranged to face the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is more than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 penetratingly formed with a slightly larger inner shape, and an opening 414 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction in the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wave shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the lighting unit 401. This makes it possible to easily perform lateral alignment when fitting the lighting unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410.

The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). Thereby, the wiring extending through the tubular portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the rear surface side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the lighting unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the rear surface side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Accordingly, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the lighting unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visually recognized in a front view. The upper edge plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is provided with the LED 14e2 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 414.

The body member 411 has, on the back side, a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape in a top view, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side on the lower end surface of the right corner, and a recessed portion from the back side on the lower end surface of the left corner. A supported groove 418, a fastening portion 419 which is arranged in a symmetrical position in the vicinity of the upper end portion and is formed so that a screw can be screwed therein, and a screw formed in a position closer to the upper and lower sides so that the screw can be screwed therein. The fastening portion 419b is mainly provided.

The wavy side portions 416 have a shape that matches the shape of the opposing positions of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the lower edge front side end portion). As a result, when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, the horizontal positioning can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape such that the left and right claw portions can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state (see FIG. 86). 8), the load (weight, etc.) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface in which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the decorative portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86 ), the upper panel unit 400 is provided via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. A load (weight, etc.) given from the electric decoration 8031 can be applied to the electric decoration 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is arranged at a position where the screw inserted in the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and projects in a rib shape from the base portion to a position where the tip portion does not reach. The enlarged rib 419a is provided.

As will be described later, the enlarged ribs 419a are configured such that the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a are fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 419, so that the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are attached to the main body frame 14a. It is a portion sandwiched between and (see FIG. 125(a)), which will be described in detail later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are provided with three ribs of the same shape at 120° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 122) at the lower position of the main body member 411. It is formed at a position corresponding to, and is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at an upper position of the main body member 411, which will be described later in detail.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a corrugated wall portion 422 formed in a corrugated shape at a lower edge front side edge of the main body member 421 in bottom view, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 formed to have an L-shaped cross section and extending upward from the extending end portion of the main body plate portion 421. An opening 424 is mainly provided, which is arranged at a position spaced apart from the left-right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) at the same distance in the left-right direction and includes a plurality of small-diameter through holes penetrating in the vertical direction.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and rear contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 abuts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is an opening in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) that allows a vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 to pass through (release to the outside). The right-corner support member 430R and the left-corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 that are circular openings that allow vibration generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 to pass therethrough.

The right corner support member 430R is provided with a horizontally long rectangular through hole 430R2 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. The light emitted to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. Note that, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to facilitate understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted into the connection holes 469, and at the left and right ends, The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having a substantially symmetrical shape, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device for converting an electric signal into an audible sound wave so that the speaker can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted into the through hole 466 to form a front flange 452 of the speaker 451. The front assembly 460 fastened and fixed from the front side is formed to have an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and a space is formed between the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). The side assembly 480 is mainly provided.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front side assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front side assembly 460 and emits a performance sound in connection with a game. One end of the speaker 451 is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. The speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire including a copper wire and a covering portion that covers the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the speaker connection wire 453 is terminated. When the connector is connected to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front surface of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the sound reproduced from the speaker 451 is squeezed. High-quality sound can be reproduced and output without the need for audio. Further, the protective cover 454 can favorably protect the front surface of the speaker 451 without degrading the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a main body 461 which is long in the left-right direction and is formed in a cup shape with an open rear side, and a plurality of semi-circular recesses formed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the center of the vertical width. Of the recessed portion 462 and the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as that of the recessed portion 462 from the rear side edge toward the outer side in the vertical width to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 in the form of a plate. A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear end of the main body 461 to the front side; a light passage through hole 465 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 461; A circular through hole 466 that penetrates the speaker 451 in the right side portion, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 that extend in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body portion 461 to the rear side, and A plurality of fastening portions 468 to which the screws inserted through the side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed, and a connection hole 469 through which the screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted. And a front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the rear surface side to the front surface side at the lower end portion of the front end side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 is a region divided in the left-right direction, and the base end side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and the center side in the left-right direction of the base end side main body portion 461B (see FIG. 121). It mainly includes an intermediate main body 461M continuously provided on the left side) and a tip side main body 461T continuously provided on the center side in the left-right direction of the intermediate main body 461M (left side in FIG. 121). The base body 461B, the intermediate body 461M, and the tip body 461T are continuously formed with a space formed between them and the rear assembly 480.

The main body portion 461 includes a back side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire outer shape of the main body portion 461 in a front view. The back side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion that does not have a barb inside (an edge portion where a flange or the like is not formed inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. To be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 463a is inserted into the co-fastening hole 14a2 and the co-fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a, and the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480 and It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched therebetween (the resin material is sandwiched and fastened to the hard material). As a result, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 is inserted. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wiring passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed. 121 and 122, the illustration of the back side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is visible.

Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage concave portion 464 is formed not in the rear side assembly 480 but in the front side assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 are assembled, It is possible to easily pass the speaker connection line 453, which is connected to the speaker 451 in advance, through the wiring passage concave portion 464. Thereby, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through hole 465 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is directed toward the lens member 440.

The passage-forming ribs 467 come into contact with the passage-forming ribs 487 of the rear assembly 480 in the front-rear direction without a gap, and bend a plurality of times in a space formed between the front-side assembly 460 and the rear-side assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). Is a rib that forms the. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed with a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly outwardly protrudes from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 has a body portion 481 that is long in the left-right direction and is formed in a cup shape with the front side open, and a tip semicircle recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width. An extension plate extending in a plate shape from the rear side edge of the plurality of recessed portions 482 and the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482 toward the outer side in the vertical width to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 convexly provided on the front side of the main body portion 481, a light passage through hole 485 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction in the upper right corner portion of the main body portion 481, and a cup-shaped portion of the main body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape from the bottom plate (back side plate) to the front side, and a through hole formed as a through hole into which a screw is inserted at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 468 of the front side assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. Mainly, a plurality of through holes 488 and a rear recess 491 that is recessed from the front side to the back side at a position corresponding to the front recess 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction.

The main body portion 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body portion 481 at a position that is moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body portion 461 of the front side assembly 460 with respect to the outer shape of the rear side plate, and the front side assembly 460. The front side wall 481H is formed in a shape to be fitted into the inner side surface of the rear side wall 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R is provided with a double wall portion fitted around the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the speaker assembly 450R, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the acoustic effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions that are protruded toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at positions where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched by the left and right with a space allowing passage of the speaker connection wire 453. It is equipped with 481 Ha.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being displaced when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha have a tapered shape that widens left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)), the speaker connection line 453 is separated from the wiring passage recessed portion 464. Even if it comes off and is displaced to the left and right, the displacement can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 has an outer shape that is the same as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. The recessed portion is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-fastening hole 14a2 and the co-fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and the through hole 483a and the front side assembly 460 are passed through. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the rear surface side of the main body frame 14a by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 so that the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is formed so as to protrude along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481, has a width to be fitted into the wiring passage concave portion 464, and has a depth smaller than the concave depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464. The speaker connection wire 453 is provided with a protruding length that is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453.

That is, by inserting the speaker connection wire 453 into the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464, the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion are formed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the opening formed by being surrounded by 464 and the speaker connection wire 453. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to the sound leakage from the opening for passing the speaker connection line 453.

The light passing through hole 485 is a through hole that allows the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 to pass therethrough. The light passage through hole 485 is formed of a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape in which the cross sectional shape increases toward the front side, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), the light passage through holes 465 and 485 communicate with each other in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming ribs 487 are formed at the same positions as the passage forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in front view, abut on each other without a gap in the front and rear, and form a plurality of spaces in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is a rib that forms a bent passage (see FIG. 123) that bends once. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is formed at the front and rear ends of the front side wall portion 481H and the surface position. That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the rear side plate of the main body 481. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed in such a size that a front end portion abuts the passage forming rib 467, and at that time, a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 487 is loaded with a compressive force directed rearward from the passage forming rib 467, and the compressing force closes the gap between the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 124(b)).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming ribs 487 in the left-right direction is weak and the passage forming ribs 487 may be bent leftward or rightward, the compressive force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the rear surface is overlapped). The strength can be strengthened by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be prevented from bending to the left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. You can

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed in a shape that is reversed from the front recessed portion 471 in the front-rear direction, and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed to have a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly outwardly protrudes from the outer shape). It is placed in a position that surrounds the outer shape.

123A is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123B is a front view of the rear assembly 480. 123(a) and 123(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 that are arranged to face each other face each other. Is shown in a state of being unfolded toward the front side of the drawing. That is, by folding FIG. 123(a) and FIG. 123(b) around a line (not shown) vertically drawn to the left-right center of the paper surface, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are determined. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100 ), inside the speaker assembly 450, an acoustic chamber is provided on the rear side of the base end side main body portion 461 B of the front side assembly 460. Has been formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as a base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path of the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back surface side of the speaker 451 extends toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes and are vertically staggered toward the left side. And rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment).

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and The wiring can be prevented from being sandwiched between the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480.

Since each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, the rigidity of the main body portion 461 is strengthened by each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. You can

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e cooperate with the passage forming ribs 487 of the rear assembly 480 to form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back side of the speaker 451 is passed.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 travels linearly. However, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws is avoided by avoiding the passage forming rib 467. It will proceed.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123A as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws has a left side (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, rib portion 467b) that is arranged on the L side and is closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrow L, U direction).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 on the lower side, and is closest to the left and right direction (for example, on the rib portion). When the rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (arrow L, D direction).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are alternately arranged vertically as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path that is vertically bent, It is possible to secure a longer traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws as compared with the lateral width of the space.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, and suppress the generation of the standing wave due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same action as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be produced by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed immediately near the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the directions of arrows L and U.

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

As shown in FIG. 123( b ), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that presses the wiring, and are alternately staggered vertically to the left at a plurality of locations (main). In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e arranged at 5 locations are provided.

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e strengthens the rigidity of the main body portion 487. You can

Here, the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are formed in a shape that matches the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front side assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and are assembled (see FIG. 100). (See), they are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction.

The action of each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is similar to the action of the rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same action as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be produced also by the recessed portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is left on the upper left side between the recessed portion 482 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). It is possible to proceed in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect of assembling.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in vertical width with increasing distance from the speaker 451, and is once narrowed at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are vertically aligned. Further, the vertical width is enlarged at a distance at a position further away from the speaker 451, and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so that the output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is output. The generated vibration wave Ws (voice) travels toward the tip side main body portion 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of the exit. The vibration wave Ws (sound) reaching the tip side main body portion 461T sequentially passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening portion 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420. As described above, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the back surface of the speaker 451 has an inner path of the speaker assembly 450, an opening formed by the recessed portions 471, 491, and an opening 424 ( (See FIG. 120), it is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010, so that the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is reproduced and output with high sound quality without being covered. You can

The bass reflex-type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, so that the sound output from the front surface of the speaker 451 has the same phase as the recessed portions 471 and 491. It is possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel each other out of phase with the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify the deep bass. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can perform an effect that is full of a sense of presence, and can enhance the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91 ), so that the bass output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is generated by the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). This makes it possible to appropriately provide the player with the low-pitched sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws is used as a path to avoid the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is prescribed. Therefore, the vibration wave Ws (voice sound) is set by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extension length in the vertical direction. ) You can tune the sound.

In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front side assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear side assembly 480 are provided in addition to the above purpose. The speaker assembly 450 is arranged in a portion to which a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450.

For example, each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can be reinforced near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by being arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed in.

Further, the extended plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched between the enlarged ribs 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state and pressed (see FIG. 125(a)), and the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing a screw into the fastening portion 468, the fastening portion 419 that is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 463 and 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d are brought into contact with each other so that the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 The deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions to which the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is fixed to the upper side plate member. In the state before being fastened and fixed to 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462 and 482 from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. However, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, and therefore the recessed portion 14e1 is recessed. The load applied to the portions 462 and 482 can be reinforced, and the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 can be improved.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is performed. It can be easily suppressed.

Note that in such an illegal act, a wire or a piano wire is illegally intruded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, however, the speaker assembly 450 has the front recessed portion 471. In addition to the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the box shape is closed, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is introduced into the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is opened through an opening different from the entry location. It is possible to make it difficult to make the tip of wire or piano wire reach the game area through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453, through the through hole formed at 450.

In addition, since the through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 in the upper side plate member 14e is arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speaker 451, a wire or a piano wire is provided. It is possible to increase the distance between the front recessed portion 471 and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, which is a place where the above-mentioned components enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even when such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be reduced, and it is possible to easily prevent the profit of the fraudulent activity from being generated.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124A is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124A, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124A. is there. Note that, in FIGS. 124A and 124C, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124C, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated. Are not shown.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124(b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines toward the rear side. The outer side surface 481Ho (upper surface of FIG. 124(b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side and fits with the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that Thereby, the work efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124B, the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. The compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c by the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which abutting rib portions generate a compressive load.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate main body portion 461M has a front-rear dimension shorter than that of the base end side main body portion 461B and the front end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass in the intermediate main body portion 461M can be made smaller (thinner) than that of the tip-side main body portion 461T. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the tip side main body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body portion 461M. It is ensured to be large in the aspect of bulging in the front-back direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained at the distal end side main body portion 461T and can be released at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear deep bass due to the vibration wave Ws.

125(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124B is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e taken along the line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a screw inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a, which is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, whereby the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and The upper side plate member 14e is a portion sandwiched between the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a. That is, by disposing the enlarged rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extended plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125( b ), the second fastening portion 419 b is fastened to the fastening portion 14 e 1 of the upper side plate member 14 e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (passing through without contacting the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction), whereby the front side assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 are formed. It is configured as a portion for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without the side assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together with the second fastening portion 419b at the upper side position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is provided at the second fastening portion 419b at the lower side position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, but the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the back side is disposed inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In the present embodiment, the left and right separate speakers 451 are arranged in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, so that the reproduction output is performed from the speakers 451 arranged in the partner speaker assemblies 450R and 450L. It is possible to avoid conflict with the played sound, and to play back the played sound with high quality as a transparent sound without damaging the played sound.

In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in contact with each other on the upper surface of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125(a)), while the speaker assembly 450 In the lower portion, the rear surface of the rear side assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front surface portion of the upper side plate member 14e is provided so as to project to the front side in a portion arranged to face the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480, The protruding portion and the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not in a structure in which the speaker assembly 450 abuts (sticks) on the entire surface of the upper side plate member 14e, and in particular, in the lower end portion, a line contact is made.

In this case, since the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin), but is not limited to this. It is not something that will be done.

For example, a metal member may be arranged between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony, or a glass member may be arranged. Alternatively, a concrete member may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

Particularly when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to adopt cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel or the like. By using these metals, the sound can be made thicker.

Further, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (porcelain), etc. are applicable. When these members are used, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Also, regarding the shape, it may be projected in the shape of a long plate, may be projected in the shape of a spike, or may be projected in a scattered manner in a rounded shape. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, but may be connected in a floating manner.

The arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is not limited to the rear surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, it may be the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450.

For example, in the case of arranging on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a tubular shape, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted. You may position by that. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning a member that functions as an insulator can be eliminated, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator can be functioned depending on the tightening condition of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the acoustic effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123A) and the connecting hole 469. The upper side is formed by a screw inserted into the through hole provided in the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction and the through hole provided at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through hole is arranged. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

Further, regarding the fixing to the upper side plate member 14e of the upper side frame member 410, the upper side frame member 410 is inserted into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the rear side in addition to the screw inserted in the through hole 483a. The screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, when the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419 are fastened and fastened, the speaker assembly 450 is configured so that no load is applied. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fastening the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e while loosely tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the tightening condition).

Further, the same relationship as the above-described relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e is also applicable to the relationship between the speaker frame 450 and the main body frame 14a that is fixedly connected to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. .. Note that FIG. 127(b) illustrates the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support part 12a and a left end rear support part 12b are spaced apart from each other in order to support the left end part of the game board 13. It is arranged.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines rearward as it goes leftward from the right end portion of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into surface contact with each other.

The left end rear support part 12b is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the front end face is formed on one face so that the back face of the game board 13 can come into contact with the back face, and the center part is formed in an open cup shape. .. The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end portion disposed inside thereof and having a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture in which the elastic support portion 12b1 projects to the front side toward the left in a natural length state. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands in the left-right direction to the side (rightward) on which the game board 13 is arranged, in cooperation with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when the worker assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128(a) and 128(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b), and FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b) are board surface supporting devices 600. It is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. 128 and 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 whose left end has been pushed into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. 128(b) and 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and in FIG. 129(b), the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding, the configurations of a part of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted.

When an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, the upper and lower positions of the game board 13 are aligned to some extent, and then the left end of the game board 13 is set. The part is slid between the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture in which it is rotated about an axis oriented in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is supported. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the game board 13 is centered around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). It is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged so as to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is restricted by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-shaped portion that is formed in the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and a length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 that are supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in a top view in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(b). Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be smoothly progressed by riding the game board 13 on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the leftward position. .. Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15°, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game shop. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation, so that the game does not depend on the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when assembling the board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 is not limited to this, and the inclination angle may be formed to be the same as the rear inclination at the time of installing the game shop. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board surface support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and in a released state described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the front regulation pawl member 630 (portions arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to be retracted from the path, the workability of the assembling work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 to the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board surface supporting device 600 will be described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600 change their states almost at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is restricted. As shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, the board surface support device 600 does not contact the lower end portion of the game board 13 (game). The board 13 is not pushed up by the board supporting device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d can be stably attached/detached by changing the state of the board support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 is pushed to the back side, the game board 13 is rotating with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum. Therefore, by the lever principle, the rotating claw member 640 is rotated through the game board 13. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be weakened by the long width of the game board 13, and even a weak operator can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b at two positions (see FIG. 126). When the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 when the right end of 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600 is not in a fixed state). Also, the extent to which the game board 13 tilts forward can be lowered.

For example, when the upper board surface support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the game board 13 is pushed by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12 to close it. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the reaction that pushes the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end portion is fixed by the board surface supporting device 600, and the lower end portion is vertically positioned on the support bottom portion 12c. Is regulated.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end on the back side of the game board 13 and connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. Floating connector 13a which is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so as to be positionally changeable in the surface direction of the game board 13, and is disposed on the inner frame 12 near the lower board surface supporting device 600 and is a control board. Wirings connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like are connected to the receiving side connector 12d connected on the back side in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is oriented along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of connection in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface support device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower parts are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since a pair of upper and lower board surface support devices 600 having the same configuration are disposed face to face, one board surface support device 600 will be described, and description of the other board surface support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131( b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. 130(a) and 130(b) show a fixed state in which the board surface support device 600 fixes the game board 13. In FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), the board surface support device 600 is used. The release state in which the fixation of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface supporting device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface supporting device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 600 is rotatable about a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed in the frame member 610. A rotation front pawl member 620 that is axially supported, and a regulation front pawl member that is rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 that is disposed on the front side of the rotation front pawl member 620 and that is inserted and fixed to the front rotation pawl member 620. 630 and a post-rotation pawl member 640 that is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 that is arranged on the back side of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation pawl member 620.

The frame member 610 includes a body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle, and a pair of body plate portions 611 that are part of the body plate portion 611 and are arranged to face each other on the left and right. A pair of support holes 612 penetratingly formed in the plate portion 611a, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the support hole 612 in the front side. , An arc recess 614 recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612, and inserted and fixed in the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A rod-shaped restricting rod 615 and a pair that is extended from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by a screw that is inserted into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127B). And a fixing plate 616 of.

The support hole 612 is a through hole into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member whose end on the insertion base end side is expanded, and is inserted into the support hole 612, and then the end on the insertion tip side is pressed. , Fixed to the support hole 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 at the same time.

Like the frame member 610, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are penetratingly formed in the plate portion 621a that is disposed opposite to each other on the left and right and that are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrating in the straight line in the front-side upper corner portion of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 which are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed and which are penetratingly formed in a straight line at the back side portion of the plate portion 621a. The holes 624 are mainly provided.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, at the same time, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the pre-regulation claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotation pawl member 640.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is disposed so as to be opposed to each other on the left and right, and includes an elongated portion 621a1 that is elongated in the front-rear direction and an extending portion 621a2 that extends vertically from the front end of the elongated portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in a side view, a connecting plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the rear end of the connecting plate portion 621b. And a rear side extension plate 621c extending downwardly by about 45 degrees and extending from the rear side end of the extension portion 621a2 toward the opposite side plate portion 621a perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a. The pendant back plate part 621d to be installed, and the front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end portion of the pendant back plate part 621d with an inclination of about 45 degrees to the front side with respect to the surface of the pendant back plate part 621d. And mainly.

The drooping back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a surface orthogonal to the elongated portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. An angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed to be at a right angle to each other.

The rear surface side extension plate 621c is arranged so that the lower surface thereof can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, in the released state, the torsion spring NBb comes into contact with the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb away from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)), while the torsion spring is in the process of changing to the fixed state. By retracting above NBb, the torsion spring NBb begins to contact the main body plate portion 611.

Accordingly, when the worker starts pushing the game board 13 into the board surface supporting device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface supporting device 600. Immediately before finishing, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, the force required for rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface supporting device 600, while lowering the force required at the start of pushing.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that abuts on the game board 13 from the front side and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13. The front side extending plate 621e functions as a guide guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the hanging back surface plate portion 621d come close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction of separating the lower end portion of the post-rotation claw member 640 from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The pre-regulation claw member 630 is a main body plate portion 631 that is formed in a character shape in a side view by bending a metal plate member at a corner at right angles, and is a part of the main body plate portion 631 and is arranged to face left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 that are penetratingly formed in the plate portion 631a that are linearly formed and that are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and the front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portion 631a is inclined from the lower end to the front side. An inclined extending plate 633 that is extended in a curved manner and a curved surface 634 that is curved and formed as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a are mainly provided.

The inclined extending plate 633 is a plate portion arranged to face the front frame 14, and is a portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface supporting device 600 is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126 ), and thus the free posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted.

The post-rotation pawl member 640 is a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at right angles, and is a part of the main body plate portion 641 and is arranged to face left and right. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported holes 642 that are penetratingly formed through the plate portion 641a that is linearly formed and that is pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63 to the rear side. An inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended is mainly provided.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in a released state (see FIG. 129(a)), at an inclination angle that comes into surface contact with the back surface of the game board 13. It is formed.

FIG. 134(a), FIG. 134(b), FIG. 135(a) and FIG. 135(b) are side views of the board surface support device 600. Note that, in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), a process in which the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. In addition, in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), the multifunctional cover member 171 and the panel surface support device 600, which are arranged close to the panel surface support device 600, are fixed. The arrangement of the game board 13 is shown in phantom lines.

That is, FIG. 134(a) shows the released state of the board surface supporting device 600, and FIG. 135(b) shows the fixed state of the board surface supporting device 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). Thereby, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 by only performing a simple work of pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 through the game board 13 to the back side (third part). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with the biasing force in the direction of approaching the hanging back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when another external force does not act, the regulation front claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, when the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 come into contact with each other, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the front rotation pawl member 620 is rotated. While the front side on which the extended portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, the front regulation side claw member 630 rises on the front side in a state of being separated from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, while the regulation rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a which is a front surface side portion of the curved surface 634 and which intersects with a circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (from FIG. 134(a) to FIG. Up to 135(a)), the front end portion of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises as the pre-rotation claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistive portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back surface side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the restriction rod 615, When the restricting rod 615 and the curved surface 634 no longer come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is canceled, and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released. The tip end portion is arranged in proximity to the drooping back plate portion 621d (see FIG. 135(a) to FIG. 135(b)).

In the angular range (the range between FIG. 134(a) and FIG. 135(a)) in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves up, the front end portion of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the pre-regulation claw member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, the posture change of the regulation front pawl member 630 when operating with the downward load changes the posture toward the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). Since the posture changes), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the posture change of the regulation front claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 contacts the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front rotation pawl member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 without the game board 13 being pushed inward.

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the pre-rotation pawl member 620 from rotating due to the downward load applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied from the front frame 14 to the pre-regulation claw member 630, it is possible to prevent the pre-rotation claw member 620 from tilting. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed in the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship of abutting the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 in the released state of the board support device 600. The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length of the inclined extension plate 633, and the inclination angle are set.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), when the game board 13 is brought into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, the back side extension plate is moved when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Rubbing friction occurs between the 621c and the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state of FIG. 134(b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Here, when the front surface frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board surface supporting device 600, in the case where the front rotation pawl member 620 is rotated by the load from the front surface frame 14, the front surface frame 14 is arranged on the front surface frame 14. Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630, when the board surface supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state and when the board surface supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state, the board surface supporting device 600 is stable at a halfway angle. There may be cases where

If the board surface support device 600 stabilizes at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13. The distance will be shortened, which may hinder the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the front rotation pawl member 620 is prevented from rotating due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunction provided in the front frame 14 is adopted. When the cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 contact each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. As a result, it is possible to make a clerk working on closing the front frame 14 notice that the board support device 600 is not in a fixed state.

If this is noticed, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface supporting device 600 is in the fixed state, and the back surface of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135A, in the state immediately before the rotation front pawl member 620 is fixed, the multifunction cover member 171 and the regulation front pawl provided on the front frame 14 are provided. Depending on the mode of contact of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the board surface supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state and the case where the board surface supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively, The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 extends to a position where it can contact the front regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. The front regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture thereof is not regulated by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the contact between the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the front pawl member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulation front pawl member 630 immediately before the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is in the fixed state, the front end of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board surface supporting device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force for pushing the game board 13 by the store clerk is slightly insufficient, 90% stable). The case where the front frame 14 is not closed, and in this case, a load is applied to the board surface support device 600 from the multi-function cover member 171 arranged in the front frame 14. In addition, the board support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface supporting device 600 can be improved. In the present embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board surface support device 600 in the released state such that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extending plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 are in contact with each other (see FIG. )), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the back side. That is, the claw member 640 after rotation is displaced by the game board 13, the claw member before rotation 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board surface support device 600 is changed to a fixed state. According to this method, since the downward load is not applied to the front end portion of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the board surface supporting device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing the hanging back plate portion 621d away, and therefore, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 via the post-rotation pawl member 640. The biasing force of the torsion spring NBb given to is given as a resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side. This can reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistive portion 634b is arranged opposite to the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate 621d to rotate the front rotation pawl member 620, the first shaft member P61 is centered. The non-resistive portion 634b comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the direction along the arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

This can reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

In addition, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 extends from the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(a) to the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius around the biaxial member P62 is gradually increased.

As a result, from the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the multi-function cover member 171 pushes the inclined extension plate 633 toward the rear surface side, and the front rotation pawl member 620 rotates to displace the second shaft member P62. The non-resistive portion 634b and the restriction rod 615 are separated from each other for a moment. Therefore, the resistance applied from the restriction rod 615 to the pre-regulation claw member 630 is reduced for a moment, so that the pre-regulation claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board surface supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135(b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship in which it is separated from the front regulation claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Also, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the board surface supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135(a), the multifunction cover member 171 is provided with the front regulating claw member 630 and the inclined extending plate 633. After that, the board surface support device 600 can be fixed.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface supporting device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged in the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface supporting device 600. That is, in the state where the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the front rotation pawl member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is provided with the multi-function cover member 171. The operation can be performed while avoiding the interference (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a)). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when the board surface is replaced), it is possible to avoid restricting the closure of the front frame 14. The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board surface support device 600 is released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled to the upper front side and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), so that the regulating front pawl member 630 can be rotated with a light force, and the rotation is continued as it is. By doing so, the board support device 600 can be brought into a released state.

When the board support device 600 is released with the game board 13 fixed, the game board 13 is pushed to the front side by the displaced rotating claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, as compared with the case where the front-back position of the game board 13 does not change when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), in the released state, the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the risk that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are in the released state.

In addition, the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600 can perform an operation of switching between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, as in the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to the state change of the board support device 600, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and back positions of the game board 13 are misaligned in the vertical direction. The load applied to the game board 13 may be excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 that are operated when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state. And do not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), compared with the amount of displacement of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member that support the game board 13 are compared. The amount of displacement of 640 is smaller.

Therefore, when displacing the pre-regulation claw member 630 to the extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the regulation rod 615 regulates the return), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are displaced. Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the front and rear positions of the game board 13 at the portions supported by the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, since the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620, the same effect can be obtained. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 resists the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb and the pre-rotation pawl member 620. And the post-rotation claw member 640 can be displaced in a direction to widen the angle.

Therefore, as compared with the displacement amount of the pre-rotation claw member 620, the displacement amount of the game board 13 pushed out to the post-rotation claw member 640 can be suppressed, so that the game board at a position supported by the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and rear positions of 13. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board surface supporting device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. Note that, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 136, the released state of the board surface supporting device 600, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface supporting device 600, and in FIG. 138, the board surface supporting device 600 is moved from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle (about 25°). ) In the rotated state, in FIG. 139, the state immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed is illustrated, and the plate thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line. To be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the board surface supporting device 600 and the opening/closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. Note that, for ease of understanding, the opening/closing restricting portion 159, which is viewed in cross section in FIGS. 136 and 137, is illustrated in phantom lines in FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136 ), the interference between the opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 interferes with the operation portion rear member 155 above the opening/closing restriction portion 159. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is disengaged, but close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is arranged. Is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface supporting device 600 is in a fixed state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), the interference between the opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the board surface supporting device 600 is avoided. .. In addition, the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, so that the interference between the game board 13 and the operation portion back surface member 155 above the opening/closing restriction portion 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, it is possible to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the front rotation pawl member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state by a predetermined angle, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 138), The open/close restriction unit 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the front rotation pawl member 620 by applying a load to the inclined extension plate 633 facing the back side, due to the action of the regulating rod 615, the rotation direction of the front rotation pawl member 620 is increased. (Fig. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (Fig. 138 counterclockwise direction) are opposite to each other, so that the reaction force becomes excessive. As described above (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is provided, the front lower end of the game board 13 and the rear extension plate 621c may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of restricting the closing of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the front rotation pawl member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is formed. The inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes with each other.

Further, in this state, when it is attempted to rotate the front rotation pawl member 620 by applying a load to the inclined extension plate 633 facing the back side, the rotation of the front rotation pawl member 620 is caused by the action of the restriction rod 615. The direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the front regulation claw member 630 (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) are not opposite to each other, and as described above, it can be easily pushed in under normal load. Yes (see FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the regulation front pawl member 630 is pushed through the opening/closing regulating portion 159, and the board surface supporting device 600 can be fixed. Therefore, it is allowed to close the front frame 14.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. It should be noted that FIGS. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back surfaces of the ball firing unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launch unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143(a) illustrates a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143(b) illustrates a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then reversed. .. That is, in FIG. 143(b), only the ball receiving member 731 is shown on the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 formed of metal or die casting, and a base member 711 mounted on the base member 710 with the right side of the base member 711 as a center. It is pivotally supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142(a)) that partially covers the front surface of 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23(a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. Mainly, a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, is locked by a hook or the like that elastically deforms to the base member 710, is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of a synthetic resin or the like. In order to regulate the attitude of the firing solenoid 701 arranged on the front side, the firing rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 hit by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731. A fastening portion 716 that is cylindrically protruded toward the front side at a middle position of the bulging portion 716a that is bulged in a straight line from the base member 710 to the front side, into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed, The mounting hole 718 and the positioning protrusions 719 are mainly provided.

The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-shaped portions 722 are inserted at the right corner, and locking portions 713 formed on the opposite sides of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction so that the hook portions 723 can be locked. , A convex portion 714 that is convexly provided on the front side in the vicinity of the right side of the locking portion 713 and the attraction force generating solenoid 741 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)). A defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided is mainly provided.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), and is inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing flat surface 714a formed as a flat surface parallel to the left inner side surface 724c and facing the side surface 724c, and a surface on the left and right opposite to the facing flat surface 714a, which slopes to the right toward the rear side. And a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not contact the suction force generation solenoid 741 but the fastening force of the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loose ( The cover member 721 is in contact with the cover member 721 when the cover member 721 is in a floating state, and is formed with a protruding height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed in a state where the fastening force of the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is loose. It can be noticed that the engagement of the generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before the malfunction of the ball firing unit 112a occurs, repair (fixing the attraction force generation solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed in advance.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 that is rotatably axially supported by the base member 711, a restricting state that restricts the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144). The switching device 740 is controlled so as to change its state depending on whether it is allowed to flow down to the firing rail 730.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side of the paper in the posture of FIG. 143(a)) is opened from a light-transmissive resin material and is loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. Rod portion 722, a hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod portion 722, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passes at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 to the rod portion 722 side. A sphere passage opening 724 that is bored in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 that is arranged in a positional relationship that extends slightly upward from the lower edge of the inner end portion of the sphere passage opening 724, The switching device 740 mainly includes a shaft rod portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742.

The switching device 740 is a suction force generation solenoid 741 that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and a synthetic resin member whose one end is loosely fitted in the shaft rod portion 726. The suction force generation solenoid 741 generates a magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not it is a metal plate 743 that is a metal plate member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and that is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741; A guide inclined portion 744 that is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is disposed below the sphere passage opening 724 and is inclined downward as it moves away from the sphere passage opening 724, and the sphere P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. A restriction overhanging portion 745 that is extended by a certain distance, and has an extended end that projects toward the ball passage opening 724 side along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 726.

The sphere passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided, and a falling plate portion 724a that descends and inclines in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotational radial direction, A rib portion 724b, which is disposed above the flow-down plate portion 724a so as to face each other, extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape, and the extended front end surface inclines downward toward the rear side, and the flow-down plate portion 724a. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c which is continuously provided with the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), the sphere P8 contacts the inclined surface 714b and the inclination of the inclined surface 714b. Run down to the back side while shifting to the right along. Therefore, the sphere P8 flows down in a manner that the sphere P8 is separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, so that the sphere P8 and the cutting metal 725 are arranged while projecting the cutting metal member 725 inside the sphere passage opening 724. Collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member extending from the intermediate position of the base member 710 so as to incline upward toward the left side. Near the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is arranged with an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 is parallel to the elongated direction and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A straight line (a straight line that passes through the through hole 731a and faces the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) and a through hole 731a that is formed as a long hole along the direction and that allows the fastening screw to pass through, and the bulging portion 716a. And a regulation groove 731b formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716 is selected, the ball receiving member 731 is swollen by the swollen portion 716a. It can be slid along the straight line that is taken out, whereby the standby position of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) (distance from the plunger 702) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing intensity of the ball P81 (the firing intensity when the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the restricting groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed by bending a metal plate to have a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape, a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and a rolling plate portion 730a extending diagonally upward to the left, and rolling. The mounting plate portions 730b and 730c are hung from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) mounting holes 732 are formed in the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c. Attached to member 710.

In addition, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, and a sound or a vibration generated by the contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball is generated. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, contacts the front and rear two points on the peripheral surface of the ball P8 (see FIG. 146(b)), and moves the ball P8 upward. Configured to guide.

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the delivery status of the balls by the ball delivery device 720 in time series. Note that in FIGS. 144A to 144C, the cover member 721 is not shown for easy understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144(a), the switching device 740 is in the restricted state (the supply of power to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped, and the ball guiding arm member 742 is descending by gravity). When it is, the restriction overhanging portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, contacts the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144( b ), when the switching device 740 is changed to the allowable state (the state in which the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is supplied with electric power and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the restriction overhang portion 745. Moves above the sphere, and the restriction of the flow down of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows in above the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P8 comes into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711 to prevent further downward flow, and stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the restricted state again, and the ball P8 riding on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not contact the front side wall of the base member 711. To be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), even in the state shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 is also shown. Is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the firing rail 730 one by one. The sphere P8 entering the sphere passage opening 724 is a sphere supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86) and stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and has a through hole 725a in which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 is formed so as to be inserted therethrough, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b and a lower blade portion 725b, and a notch having a sharp tip is formed between the lower blade portion 725b and the lower blade portion 725b. And an upper blade part 725c extending from the main part.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side with respect to the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side is projected above the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade 725c is inclined downward toward the base end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade 725b is inclined upward toward the base end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in a front view.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as a tacho thread fixed to the ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, a description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixedly attached to the sphere P8 and made to enter.

146(a) is a front view of the ball launch unit 112a, and FIG. 146(b) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit 112a as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). ) Is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball firing unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after the ball P8 is fired. Note that, in FIGS. 146 and 147, in order to facilitate understanding, illustration of some of the constituent members of the ball firing unit 112a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 stays in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)). ), current is applied to the firing solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously overhangs to give a firing force to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (FIG. 147(a). )reference).

Here, one end of the thread Y8 is fixed to the ball P8, the ball P8 is hammered out, and the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved by pulling the thread Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. It is known that a loosening operation causes the ball P8 to be repeatedly detected at the winning opening by loosening it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 is configured to be cut by using the momentum of the ball P8 to fire. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed at the launch standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the yarn Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate portion 724a in a posture in which the yarn Y8 is closer to the right side toward the rear side. (See FIG. 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is driven out in this state, the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the firing rail 730 passing under the falling plate portion 724a, and the middle portion of the yarn Y8 moves to the falling plate portion 724a. Since the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface, the yarn Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c protruding above the falling plate portion 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. ..

While the player holds the front end (the other end) of the thread Y8, a load associated with the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the thread Y8 that is fixed to the ball P8. Is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal act in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected at the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 is not sufficiently pulled and the yarn Y8 is not cut, but in that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the yarn Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, and thus it is possible to prevent an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

Next, the effect operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the performance operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the performance operation unit 1000. Note that the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 is different from the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 mainly in that the petal operation device 800 can be visually recognized from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, and the others. The configurations are substantially the same.

On the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, the effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is arranged. The production operation unit 1000 is configured to include a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and an advancing/retreating operation unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100.

The advancing/retreating operation unit 900 moves up and down the petal operating device 800 by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancing/retreating operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and a third It is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in at least one of the operation of retracting toward the outside of the display area of the symbol display device 81), the petal operation device 800 is connected to one end, and the other. Is driven by the drive force of the drive motor 921 through the arm gear 924, and the drive side arm member 910 and the drive side arm member 910 are driven. A drive motor 921 that generates a drive force, a transmission unit 920 configured by a plurality of gears that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 921 to the drive-side arm member 910, and a rotation operation of the drive-side arm member 910. On the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910, and a thin plate-shaped second slide member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930. It mainly includes a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operation device 800.

Next, the structure of the petal movement device 800 will be described. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 taken along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. Note that, in FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operation device 800 is configured by supporting members such as petals 802 supported by a supporting base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is disposed on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the figure, but is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. And a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to a position on the right side of the upper end portion of the central body of the supporting base material 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 passes through a narrow gap formed in the supporting base material 801 to the front side. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156) described later is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 801P is formed at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body portion of the supporting base material 801, and the opening 801P is provided to the right of the opening 801P and extends rearward into a pair of cylindrical shapes to be internally formed. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. A donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which a circular arc plate 880d for detection of a loose fitting device 880 described later can pass is provided around the screw insertion portion 801S. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 of the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

On the front side of the support base 801, a decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed so as to open a vertically elongated generally oval region in the central portion and cover the peripheral region from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper part that constitutes the upper end region and a generally U-shaped lower part that constitutes the region below the upper part.

In the present embodiment, the supporting base material 801 has a shape that extends vertically slightly longer as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged so as to be movable up and down as described below, the supporting base material 801 is The operation space can be reduced by forming the 801 in a vertically long shape rather than in a horizontally long shape.

At this time, since the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively interlocked with (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G that are concentrically arranged so as to overlap with the position of the opening 801P as described later, respectively. The outer circumferences of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G can be arranged at arbitrary positions as long as they do not interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, they can be arranged via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively. It is arranged on the right side (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight in the right half of the petal movement device 800 supported in a slightly tilted position to the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base material 801 and the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801, and to interpose the drive-side arm member 910. The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the supporting base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. Note that in FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base material 801 is not shown for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petal 802 is made of a resin that is formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes a flower of a hibiscus in a flowering state as a whole. And a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

FIG. 157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803, and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803, and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape that extends in the radial direction in the arranged state, and has a shape that curves so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

Irregular irregularities including many wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the peripheral edge is also irregular in a front view irregular shape. The five petals 802 are not exactly the same in shape to each other, and are formed in approximately the same shape although there are slight differences in the unevenness and the like. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge portion is darkened without forming a boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a screw hole therein at two locations, namely, in the vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear surface of each petal 802 and at the radial center. There is.

The petals 802 are from the rear side portion 802a rather than the rear side portion 802a arranged on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side in front view, right side in FIG. 157(a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharpened tip side (clockwise side in front view, left side in FIG. 157(a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The front side portion 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the front side of the rear side portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one side, and the rear side portion 802a is stacked on the rear side of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other side, and thus five sheets are formed. Petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced from each other in the front-rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are overlapped with each other at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the positional relationships can be matched, the difference in shape (the difference in size) in the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made remarkable.

The five petals 802 as a whole have a disc-shaped (donut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member that is fixed to the five petals 802 and is separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape that extends in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arranged state, and has an outer peripheral edge portion that extends forward.

In addition, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (in the vicinity of the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S having a cylindrical hole extending rearward and having screw holes inside are formed in the circumferential direction (flat plate The member 803 is integrally formed at a position apart in the short side direction).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed so as to be positioned substantially on both side walls in the circumferential direction (short side direction) of each flat plate member 803, and further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the side walls of the flat plate member 803. Slide ribs 803a, which are perpendicular to a straight line connecting the 803S and extend rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape, extend to both sides along a surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. Thus, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), on the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803, there are internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the threaded portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802 of the petals 802 are located on the front side. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 from the front, and the screw is screwed from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is attached to the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. Note that in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate. On the rear side of the flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin-made plate-like member having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the central portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front side peripheral wall portion 812 and rear side peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend in the front and rear directions from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811.

Returning to FIG. 156, description will be made. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape in front of and behind each of two adjacent locations out of five locations equidistant in the circumferential direction and one location in the middle of three locations excluding the two locations. A threaded portion 813S having an internally extending screw hole is integrally formed, and the positioning boss 813a is extended from the tip edge of the above-mentioned five locations where the threaded portion 813S is not formed. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer radial direction at five locations corresponding to the threaded portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of the bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to linearly extend further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 814 is an angle θ11 (about 15° in the pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. It extends along the inclined direction D12.

The both-side slits 815 are formed on both sides of the central slit 814 so as to extend in parallel at a slight interval.

In this way, a set of three slits, the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (intervals of 72°). In addition, each end of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in a front view or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the side slits 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side of the four corners of the three slits are the two side slits. 815 has a substantially rectangular shape in the extension direction and extends slightly (a rectangular cut is formed). The rectangular extension (break) is for fitting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portions of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 are formed, has a smaller outer diameter than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

Accordingly, the circular arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed can be suppressed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set including the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 that is inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. The five sets of the central slits 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged closer to each other and are arranged more densely, which also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 compact.

In other words, it is assumed that five sets of the central slits 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11. Also, as described above, the five sets of the central slits 814 and the side slits 815 can be arranged more densely when arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin-made member having a long plate-like front shape, and has a small thickness at both ends of the slide member 820, and its front end portion has a semicircular shape in front view. The extended portion to be formed, a central portion that is thicker than the effect portion at a position between the extended portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extended portion, and the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 protruding from the front to the front side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state; and a slide pin 823 fixed so as to penetrate in the front and rear direction so as to project from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side, Equipped with.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 has a posture in which the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 of the slit member 820 and the longitudinal direction intersect at a right angle. And the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. In a fully fitted state, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the screw insertion portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 to be fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide ribs 803a of the flat plate member 803 are almost along the corresponding outer edges of the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 has a posture in which the flat plate member 803 faces a certain outward direction without rotating around the guide pin 822. It is regulated by a slide rib 803a so as to slide with.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. Note that the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted in FIG. 161(a). In the description of FIGS. 160 and 161, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate.

As described above, the rotary plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotary plate 830 is a resin disc having a circular pivot support opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotary plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 on the front side, the peripheral wall of which extends forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 and which is formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall that extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall has a shape that extends along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to close in a slender loop shape in a front view. It is formed integrally with the rotary plate 830.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivotal support opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance such as play. The ridge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to drop.

The guide rail 832 extends from the position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivotal opening 831 along the direction substantially intermediate between the tangent line of the pivotal opening 831 and the normal line to the clockwise direction in front view, and thereafter Further, it extends to a position in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotary plate 830 while curving in an arc shape further toward the clockwise direction in front view than the intermediate direction (see FIG. 175(a)).

An end portion of the guide rail 832 on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, a peripheral wall of a portion of the center side end which is circumscribed to the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall on the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion of the peripheral wall of the pivotal opening 831 projects toward the front side of the front end portion of the peripheral wall.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot support opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are spaced apart at equal intervals. It extends so as to spiral out from the surroundings to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side surface of the rotary plate 830, a second gear 830G is integrally formed so as to extend rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivotal opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and have teeth on the outer periphery thereof. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivotal opening 831 is fitted onto the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, it is not a surface planar to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830, but a linear shape. , And thereby the pivot support opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance, so that the rotary plate 830 is pivoted smoothly and freely.

On the rear side of the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the second gear 830G and larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric. , The oil damper 805 is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G.

A circular pivot support opening 810a is formed in the center of the third gear 810G, and three pivot support openings 810a are formed around the pivot support opening 810a at three positions in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the threaded portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is formed at a position corresponding to two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is disposed so as to overlap with the rear side of the second gear 830G externally fitted to the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned with respect to the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. 813a (see FIG. 156) is inserted into the positioning hole 810c for positioning, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw insertion portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlockingly linked (linked) with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 through the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G prevents the rotary plate 830 from coming off. Are held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotation device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154) and a loose fitting device 880 that is loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851 so as to be rotatable. Prepare for

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852. A flange 855 that is formed in a disk shape so as to expand its diameter at the front end is provided, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming an inner cavity portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the inner cavity portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are two front left screw-in portions 857 having screw holes therein and two front and rear screw-in portions 857 to the inner cavity portion 856 side. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a deviated position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend slightly forward in a cylindrical shape are integrally formed. .. The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856, a columnar shape is extended along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposite locations, and extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, A rear threaded portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed so as to project rearward at a position equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED board 861 is a substantially disk-shaped board having a diameter slightly smaller than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front side screw-in portion 857 and the front side positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting the front side positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and screwing a screw into the front side screw-in portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. The LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED substrate 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and having a size such that the threaded portion 869 of the central decoration member 868 can be fitted therein.

On the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, as shown in FIG. 162, one central portion and a large number of concentric circles that are spread in multiples (double) around this one portion and are arranged at equal intervals are oriented forward. The LEDs 865 are arranged and fixed, respectively, and emit light toward the front.

Lateral LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to do. The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED board 861 are arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865 alternately. A connector connecting portion 867 is arranged and fixed rearward on the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861.

A central decoration member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861. The central decoration member 868 is made of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, is extended from the long plate-shaped base in a cylindrical shape on the back side, and a screw can be screwed into the central portion. It is provided with a pair of screw-in portions 869 in which screw holes are formed.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. The threaded portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 is brought into contact with the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 across the LED substrate 861 from the front side, and the screw is screwed into the threaded portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855. As a result, the central decoration member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. Thereby, the central decoration member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861.

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed of a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. And a large diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 881. A cylindrical member with a flange that is sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and mainly includes a small diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large diameter cylindrical member 882, and a main body cylindrical member 883 that is rotatably fitted to each other.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is integrally formed with screw-in portions 883S that extend in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape and have a screw hole inside thereof at two positions separated by one out of four positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the leading edge of the formed portion, of the above-mentioned four portions, where the screw-in portion 883S is not formed.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, on the main body cylindrical member 883, at four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a, the ribs are projected in the outer diameter direction in the rib shape and the axial direction. A sliding rib 883b that extends over the entire length is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149). A back cover 886 is fastened and fixed around the diameter, and the outer peripheral side of the fastened portion rises to the front side to form a cup shape with a bottom, and also comes into contact with the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side to be fastened and fixed. , Are provided.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated on the front and back surfaces (yellow in the pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surfaces are mirror-like. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery, it is possible to perform a light emission effect.

The decoration member 884 is a member that produces a light emission effect by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861, forms a hibiscus flower shape, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a light-transmitting property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material forming a disk shape in which a peripheral wall on the back side thereof rises to the back side. An opening 885 is formed in the central portion so that the central decoration member 868 can be inserted therethrough.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured as described above is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and larger than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric. It is meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the support base 801 and mesh with each other.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

A circular pivot support opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and screw insertion holes are formed around the pivot support opening 880a at positions corresponding to the two screw-in portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are formed in the 880b at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotation device 850, and is positioned with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is inserted into the positioning hole 880c for positioning, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw insertion portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 through the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and the slit. The member 810 is held by the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to be detached.

The fourth gear 880G includes an arc plate 880d for detection that is extended to the back side in an arc shape around the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. As the circular arc plates for detection 880d, plates having the same shape are arranged at five positions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 154), the detection circular plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152), and is disposed so as to detect a member that passes through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. It is detected by the coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in the present embodiment, no matter which posture the fourth gear 880G starts to rotate, the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72°) of the detection circular plates 880d can be detected (minimum angle). Detection of 72° can be performed, and rotation of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

Assembly of the central shaft rotation device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, the respective rear ends thereof project slightly rearward from the pivot support openings 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear side positioning boss 854 that projects further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and similarly from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear screw-in portion 853 protruding further rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing the screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led out rearward (not shown) through the inner cavity portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801.

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the supporting base material 801 so as to project forward, and as shown in FIG. 154, the slit member 810 is attached to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is externally fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 locally bulges at the eight locations along the circumferential direction by the screw-in portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b, so that the rear peripheral wall portion of the slit member 810 is formed. The inner peripheral surface of the slit 813 is linearly contacted with the inner peripheral surface of the slit member 813, not the surface of the slit member 810. It is pivotally supported so that it can rotate smoothly.

FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800, the drive side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 is vertically moved (advancing and retracting) by being applied with a vertical load from the drive-side arm member 910. In the description of FIG. 164 and thereafter, FIGS. 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back face of the game board 13, and is located at the lower left corner of the front view. A support pillar 1110 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed from the front side to be accommodated above the support pillar 1110, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the left-right center position A rail fixing portion 1130 disposed on the right side of the support pillar 1110, and a support long hole 1140 formed as a long hole that is inclined downward as it gets closer to the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 interposed therebetween. Mainly equipped with.

The support columns 1110 are columnar portions that pivotally support the drive-side arm member 910, and are a pair of left and right holes near the outer periphery of the front-side end portion thereof, into which screws can be screwed. It includes a screw-in portion 1111 formed, and a pair of upper and lower positioning bosses 1112 on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111 and extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member that is bent in a V shape in rear view. A rotation shaft hole 911 that is rotatably supported by 1110; a connecting projection 912 that is provided in a stepped cylindrical shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long main body member; The petal movement device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated shape from the bending point of the lengthy main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side and the other end of the elongated main body member. The support part 914 is mainly provided.

The drive-side arm member 910 rotates the arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 fitted inside the transmission elongated hole 913, and a flange portion 926 protruding radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. Interlockingly, the support column 1110 rotates about an axis.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a concave portion for accommodating the gear of the transmission means 920, and is composed of three circular concave portions that are continuously arranged while intersecting slightly, and is arranged on the left end side to accommodate the motor gear 922. The first accommodating portion 1121, the second accommodating portion 1122 that is provided continuously with the first accommodating portion 1121, and the second accommodating portion 1122 sandwiched between the first accommodating portion 1121 and the opposite side of the first accommodating portion 1121 and the driving side arm member. Mainly includes a third accommodating portion 1123 that accommodates the arm gear 924 that is fitted with the armature 910.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked in front and back and is slidably supported up and down. An insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 is formed, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R are provided. Placed on the line. The rigidity of the motion rail 1000R maintains the posture of the petal motion device 800 constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole that slidably supports the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined and arranged so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50° in front view, and from the vicinity of the outer periphery. An extension wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear, and has one end protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the rear surface and having a spine. A supported convex portion 951 slidably supported in the supporting elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a supporting portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end are mainly provided.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted to the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a screw-in portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state where the collar is fitted inside the supporting elongated hole 1140. Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is made slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is made slightly smaller than the width of the support elongated hole 1140.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second effect member 940. FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. is there.

The slide plate 930 is supported by the lateral base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported long holes 931 formed in the front-rear direction in the shape of a long hole extending left and right. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side long hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction in the form of a long hole extending in the vertical direction provided on the left end side, and is provided on the right end side. The front end side insertion hole 933 formed in the front-rear direction is connected to the second effect member 940.

The proximal end side long hole 932 extends vertically downward from a retaining portion 932a formed along the trajectory of the connecting convex portion 912 rotating around the support column 1110 at the upper end portion and a lower end of the retaining portion 932a. The displacement part 932b is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a cylindrical portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape in front view on the left side in front view of the back plate 1100, and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the supporting pillar portion 1150 that is provided, is provided at a position corresponding to the supporting pillar portion 1150, and has a fastening plate portion 1001S that has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. In the positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the positional relationship of the supported long holes 931, a supporting convex portion 1002S that is convexly formed in a cylindrical shape toward the back side, and a circular shape is formed in the front-rear direction at the front right corner. At the same time, a shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S that is recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S similarly. And a convex strip portion 1005S that is convexly provided on the front side along an arcuate shape having the same center.

The supporting convex portion 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange from the tip of the supporting convex portion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. It is arranged in a gap between them, and in this state, a retaining screw is screwed in from the tip of the support protrusion 1002S to constitute a portion that slidably supports the slide plate 930.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arcuate recess 1004S and the ridge 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotating operation of the second effect member 940. Part. It should be noted that the ridge portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a convex height that allows the ridge portion 1005S to abut when displaced or bent from the regular position. To be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion whose lower end portion is divided into two forks and whose upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the shaft-supported strut portion 941. A columnar support portion 941 that is provided in a columnar shape and is axially supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary protrusion that is disposed in the vicinity of the shafted support portion 941 and has a columnar shape protruding toward the back side. The unit 942 is mainly provided.

The shaft-supported column portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. It is provided with an insertion portion 941a (see FIG. 152). The shaft-supported column portion 941 is inserted into the shaft supporting hole 1003S with the collar interposed therebetween, and the disk-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft supporting hole 1003S is arranged at the tip. The lid member 945 plays a role of preventing the lid member 945 from coming off when a screw is screwed into. As a result, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported on the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the tip-side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip to prevent the auxiliary protrusion 942 from coming off the slide plate 930. .. That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked with each other by connecting the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the front end side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced in the vicinity of the center of the width of the circular arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular arc concave portion 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 abuts the arc concave portion 1004S to generate resistance, so that the bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. 165. The rear plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 configured to be screwed therein when the plate-shaped support plate 921a supporting the drive motor 921 is fastened, and an outer radial direction within a predetermined angle from the arm gear 924. A detection sensor 1162 that detects a flange portion 926 that projects to the upper side, a shaft support 1163 that rotatably supports a collar that guides a coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in a direction to lift the petal movement device 800, and a support long hole. A cover supporting portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the substrate cover 1000C on the lower right side of 1140, and a wiring stop portion 1165 arranged in the vicinity of the cover supporting portion 1164 and hidden by the substrate cover 1000C in a front view. Mainly includes a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screw-in portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of the movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and a portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 is restricted, the screw-in portion 1006S causes The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be restricted.

As described above, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fixed to each of the lateral base material 1000S and the back plate 1100 that are stacked and attached to each other in the front-rear direction. 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. Accordingly, even when the petal movement device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910, it is easy to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S. You can

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the raising/lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advancing/retreating operation unit 900 will be described. FIGS. 168, 170 and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advancing/retreating operation unit 900 and the back plate. FIG. 169 is a front view of 1100, and FIGS. 169, 171 and 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advancing/retreating operation unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 show a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connection convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is arranged at the connecting position between the retaining portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base-side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the driving-side arm member 910 is arranged at the lower end side of the movement range. The closed state is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the drive-side arm member 910 has the inner fitting protrusion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151) as a base point, and extends in a tangential direction of a circle around the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and a range (idling range) in which the drive-side arm member 910 maintains the posture is generated, so that the resistance when the drive motor 921 is started is reduced. can do.

170 and 171, the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

170 to FIG. 171 to FIG. 172 to FIG. 173, it is visually recognized that the drive-side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked with each other so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked with each other. Can be made.

Here, the second effect member 940 moves to the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged in a manner of projecting toward the original position, so that the second effect member 940 operates as if following the petal motion device 800. Can be visually recognized as if

Next, the collecting and rotating operation of the petal operation device 800 will be described. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174(c) omits the central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 174 is a front view showing the petal movement device 800 in a transparent manner, and FIG. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

175(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, FIG. 175(b) is a rear view of the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 175(c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176(c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. 176 is a front view showing the petal movement device 800 in a transparent manner, and FIG. 176(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

177(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, FIG. 177(b) is a rear view of the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 177(c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 177( d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178(c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. 178 is a front view showing the petal movement device 800 in a transparent manner, and FIG. 178(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

179(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, FIG. 179(b) is a rear view of the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 179(c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 179( d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, the petal operating device 800 descends from the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 when it is lowered by the ascending/descending operation and is at the lowest position. After the middle position, the expanding operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, and further the rotating operation (second operation) is performed at the fully open position, and then the concentrating operation (third operation). It is configured to be able to return to the initial position (concentration position) by performing the operation.

At the initial position (concentration position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) has the inner end of the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811). As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are in the most concentrated position toward the central decoration member 868 at the center, and as a whole, the hibiscus in a flowering state is It is in a gathering state that composes flowers.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (concentration position) as described above, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175(c). When the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)) is interlocked with, the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by an arrow A10.

At this time, since the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivotal opening 831 with a small frictional resistance, as described above, the rotary plate 830 can easily move around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably externally fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811, as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, via the third gear 810G. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the oil damper 805 is held so as not to rotate with a small torque to the extent that the rotating plate 830 can be initially moved.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially, only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175(a), the guide rail 832 on the front side surface thereof rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as shown by the arrow A11. Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) so that the slide pin 823 is guided by the guide rail 832 and is pushed outward in the radial direction.

At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide pin 823 is linearly moved from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814. Move to be guided by.

Further, at this time, since the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, torque is applied to the slit member 810 to some extent, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque, and therefore, With the slit member 810 held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five petals 802 start the expanding operation of radially expanding from the gathering position to the outside. In this expanding operation, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is inclined in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the angle θ11 with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 177. Since the slide pin 823 extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, but on the other hand, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively large due to this inclination. Get faster.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front in this way, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the rotation amount (angle) of the rotation plate 830 causes a relatively small rotation amount (angle). 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the expansion operation of the petals 802 can be performed more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 does not have this inclination and extends radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the case described above, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and further, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined clockwise in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. Any decline is even more pronounced.

Further, at this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends from the center side end portion to the clockwise side in the front view along the direction D15 which is an intermediate point between the tangent to the pivotal opening 831 and the normal line, as shown in FIG. 177. After that, the guide rail 832 has a shape extending outward from the direction D15 while curving in an arc shape toward the clockwise side in a front view so as to spirally expand outward as a whole by the five guide rails 832. ..

As the guide rail 832 inclines toward the clockwise side in the front view as described above, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower. Further, as the guide rail 832 is curved in an arc shape toward the clockwise side in the front view with respect to the direction D15, both the reduction in the load on the slide pin 823 and the reduction in the moving speed become more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast by inclining it in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining to the clockwise side in front view and further curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is sacrificed, and the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 is configured to penetrate therethrough, there is little risk of deviation, and therefore the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. Is configured.

As described above, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 by the guide rail 832, it is possible to prevent a defect such as deviation and ensure the reliability of power transmission, while the central slit 814 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823. , Has a structure in which the roles are divided.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end that is the outer limit of movement in the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five petals 802 reach the fully open position. It spreads out radially and becomes a fully opened state, and the spreading operation ends.

In this fully opened state, as shown in FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, the five petals 802 are moved so as to be radially dispersed, so that they are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. A petal 802 is arranged at. As a result, as compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174(b)), the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 are visually recognized integrally as a flower of a hibiscus that is slightly larger (FIG. 174). 178(b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement of the central slit 814, and cannot move further outward, the slide pin 823 is locked at the outer end of the central slit 814. Therefore, the rotating plate 830 cannot rotate in the same direction as before due to a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, it is possible to maintain the fully opened state after the expansion operation is completed.

After the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction as that from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member is formed. 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as shown by an arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d) together with the rotating plate 830. Thus, after the expanding operation, the petals 802 rotate counterclockwise in the front view in the fully opened state as shown by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expanding operation and the rotary power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830, the expanding operation is immediately followed by the rotating operation so as to be continuous. Can be transferred.

When the petals 802 rotate counterclockwise in the front view in the fully opened state as shown by the arrow A13, the decoration member 884 moves in the opposite direction (clockwise in the front view) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 based on the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 becomes large, and thus the petal 802 is moved. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the rotation operation is completed and the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b), the slit member 810 is released. While being held in a stopped state by being braked by the oil damper 805, first, only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b). Is subjected to a converging operation in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement in the central slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement, and the five petals 802 are moved from the fully open position to the central decoration member 868 at the center. Then, they gather and return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to return to the gathering state, and the gathering operation ends.

After that, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operation device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the central motor 804 is operated again and the first gear 804G is further rotated clockwise in the rear view clockwise as shown by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b), the petals 802 are as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b). Rotate clockwise in the front view in the gathered state.

When the petals 802 rotate in the clockwise direction in the front view in the gathered state as shown by the arrow A16, the decoration member 884 moves in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in the front view) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 based on the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 becomes large, and thus the petal 802 is moved. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

Also from the concentrating operation to the rotating operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above, it is possible to stop the operation once and then make an interval, or to make an immediate transition so as to be continuous without any interval. You can also

Here, in the present embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection circular plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), it is possible to control the rotation angle of the central motor 804. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operating device 800 is rotating.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145, which is closed by walls on all sides, is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment is described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and the sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment, the passage forming unit 9140 has an internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and a lower end portion and a front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door-side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, firstly, the foul ball passage portion 9145 is provided with the notch 9145b which is recessed from the front end portion of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the rear side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. .. The sheet metal member 9150 is provided with a thin plate blade portion 9153 having a thin plate shape in which the portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent and formed to the front side in a manner of covering the cutout 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that is provided to protrude from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) to the back side, and is directed upward from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. Configured to withstand load.

This thin plate blade portion 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage portion 9145, and pulls or loosens the thread Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area and obtain an illegal profit. And is arranged for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, possible misconduct will be described.

Returning to FIG. 148, description will be made. As described above, the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 in order to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the sphere by using the momentum of the ball's firing. When the momentum of the firing is weak, the yarn Y8 is cut. In some cases, the ball was shot.

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, is discharged to the lower plate 50 via the foul ball passage portion 145. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering a case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the yarn Y8 is weakly struck, and when the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the ball P8 is applied to the other end of the yarn Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the yarn Y8 is arranged on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (the firing solenoid 701 side). Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is slammed out, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the yarn Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who conducts an illegal act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, and thereby the ball P9 is a winning opening. 63 (see FIG. 2), etc., can be repeatedly used, and illegal profits can be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the illegal action is performed using the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, the thin blade is formed in the foul ball passage portion 145 which the yarn Y8 necessarily passes. By disposing the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

That is, when a person who commits a dishonesty pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 is rubbed by the thin plate blade portion 9153, which damages the yarn Y8 and allows the yarn Y8 to be cut early (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the yarn Y8 is brought closer when pulling the yarn Y8 from the front side. When the yarn Y8 is pulled, the yarn Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the yarn Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance force to the upward load by contacting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. Accordingly, when the yarn Y8 is pulled, the thin plate blade 9153 is prevented from warping or bending when a load is applied to the thin plate blade 9153 toward the outside of the foul ball passage 9145. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the yarn Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the yarn Y8.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is set to about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, so that the sphere P8 is prevented from passing the front side of the notch 9145b, At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142. More specifically, the spheres are arranged with a vertical difference of about Ra. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who commits the cheating fears that the cheating is detected, after holding the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from being injured by the clerk, the ball P8 is close to the body (for example, a pants pocket or the like). ), it is easy to perform fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the yarn Y8 travels on the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (abuts on the upper surface) and extends to the player side is maintained. At this time, the yarn Y8 is stretched at a position approximately above the diameter of the sphere above the bottom surface of the sphere guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

When the prize balls are paid out in this state, the balls discharged from the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 collide with the lower plate 50 and bounce around. The bottom plate mouth arranged behind the ball removing lever 52 by stepping on the yarn Y8 arranged on the front side of 53, hitting the yarn Y8, and flowing down the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) to the right. Flow through. That is, by arranging the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the rising limit position when bouncing), the front door side lower tray It is possible to increase the possibility that the balls discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower tray 50 come into contact with the yarn Y8 and damage the yarn Y8, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 so as to incline downward toward the right. By the right inclined surface 9142a, it is possible to easily give a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 via the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142.

As a result, the ball can be directed toward the yarn Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower plate 50 is reduced. That is, the right sloping surface 9142a can forcibly give the velocity component in the right direction (toward the foul ball passage portion 9145 side) to the sphere discharged to the lower plate 50 along the front-rear direction. It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on the yarn Y8 or hit the yarn Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front-door-side lower dish passage portion 9142 occupies a region of about 2/3 of the horizontal width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 in the left portion of the ball guide opening 53. The lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53, and at the boundary thereof, the riding restraint step portion. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the riding restraint step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and a foul arranged on the right side thereof. It is configured as a plane portion that connects the left end portion (left end side) of the lower bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed on the rear side of the ball guide opening 53 above the riding restraint step portion 9053a, and the space V9 forms the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 and the foul ball passage portion. 9145 is communicated. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the front-door-side lower dish passage portion 9142 before it has passed through the sphere guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, it is possible to easily bring the ball closer to the yarn Y8.

The vertical width of the riding restraint step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and coming into contact with the ride-on regulation stepped portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the riding restraint step portion 9053a allows passage of the sphere in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (direction from left to right), and regulates in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145, which is closed by walls on four sides, is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment is described. The unit 10140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 as seen from diagonally right above, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 as seen from diagonally above left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 as left. The state seen from diagonally below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal structure of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is provided with a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending in the front side in a manner of covering the lower side of the cutout 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the end portion of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recessed direction, and the recessed depth is about the same as twice the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the sphere. It In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole formed in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the sphere is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) has the outer shape of the front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 that is arranged inside the notch 10145c and before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to project from the side surface on the rear surface side toward the rear surface. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not illustrated in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided in such a manner that the notch 10145c is partially filled (about the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction at which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is the sphere. It is set to a radius Ra of P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are cracked or chipped due to collision with the sphere P8. This can be prevented, and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-rear width) of the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 becomes wider as it gets closer to the passage portion 145a. As a result, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily inserted into the gap on the back surface side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, which is the gap in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the rear side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is the first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 is a portion that forms a bifurcated blade portion, and is extended leftward in a mode in which it slightly inclines upward from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. As a result, an acute-angled concave portion 10155 having a deep concave portion is formed between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angle concave portion 10155 is arranged on the rear surface side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front surface side of the rear surface side edge of the notch 10145c. Accordingly, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the yarn Y8 can be inserted into the acute-angled recess 10155 to easily damage the yarn Y8.

Since the second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side as compared with the first thin plate blade portion 10153, the yarn Y8 that is pulled obliquely downward by the front side by the person performing the misconduct Can easily enter the deep portion of the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portions continuously provided on the right side of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are configured to contact the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extending end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged facing the left and right opposite sides at the bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the left and right opposite directions. It That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the right and left reverse directions.

For example, the person who commits the cheating attempts to avoid the discovery of the cheating by letting go of the ball P8 that had come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area. According to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right direction is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backward flowing ball P8 is caught by the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays.

Thereby, the ball P8 and the yarn Y8 are retained inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the time during which the yarn Y8 is exposed in the game area is lengthened, whereby the detection of the illegal act can be accelerated.

It is also possible to dispose an adhesive member (paste, trim, etc.) in the deep portion of the acute-angled recess 10155 so as to bond the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has come to the person who commits the wrongdoing is cut, the thread is bonded to the adhesive member provided in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area. Since the yarn Y8 is not discharged from the yarn and is maintained on the spot, it is possible to accelerate the detection of the illegal use of the yarn Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) whose launch strength is weak and has not reached the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50, but the plate passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment is a foul ball. A foul ball receiving port 2164 for receiving is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is made of a resin material so that the outer rail 2062 is arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and has an arc shape similar to the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A guide member that is formed to a position near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 of a width in which the sphere can flow down between the tip member 2062a that is formed and is disposed in the vicinity of the sphere firing unit 112a, and the tip member 2062a. 2062b, and.

A foul ball passage 2062c communicating with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through the adjustment, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

In the present embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is moved to the left side to the position where the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is arranged in the above-described embodiment, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is Formation is omitted. That is, the spheres paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper plate 17 via the main plate side upper plate passage portion 161. When the number of balls in the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) arranged so as to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device. It is configured to stop the payout of balls from 133.

That is, in this embodiment, both the balls that have passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the balls that are paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering a fraudulent act of adhering a ball to both ends of the yarn Y8 and passing one ball through the foul ball passage 2062c into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c as described above. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by applying the payout ball to the yarn Y8 can be produced regardless of the degree of accumulation of the balls of the upper plate 17. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. Note that, in FIG. 189, a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and is shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 with the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b supporting the tilted gate member 68a being arranged on the front side.

In detail, on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. A supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity so as to project from the back surface of the guide member 2062b to the front side in a cylindrical shape and has a threaded groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed into the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is abutted against the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 contacts the front side of the closing plate 2062b4 in advance with the base member 68b1. The long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole formed as a mounting hole and a through hole 2062b5 formed in the closing plate 2062b4 by aligning the position of the through hole with the through hole 2062b5. By being inserted, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The obstruction plate 2062b4 is formed such that the upper surface and the left surface that are in contact with the guide member 2062b have the same shape as the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids the interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) that is recessed to some extent is formed as an inclined surface having the same slope as the slope increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The slope increasing portion 2062d has a slope that is downwardly inclined toward the tip member 2062a with respect to a surface forming the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending to the tip member 2062a side along the surface of the slope increasing portion 2062d is lower than the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) that constitutes the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment, in this embodiment). , About 1/3 of the diameter of the sphere) and intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is fired toward the game area, the slope increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip end of the slope increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. You can avoid that. On the other hand, when the ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball rolling on the slope increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball moves to the left and right of the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through to the ball firing unit 112a side beyond the tip member 2062a.

The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the slope increasing portion 2062d can form a notch 2062b1 between the closing plate 2062b4 and having a width (approximately 2 [mm] in this embodiment) smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter. It is recessed to the back side to a certain position. The location where the cut 2062b1 is formed is a location where the path of the ball driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is provided with a semicircular cutout 2062b3 on the side facing the slope increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. The notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, since the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed, like the method described above in the ninth or tenth embodiment, The yarn Y8 can be rubbed against the long screw B11 in a fraudulent act performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep portion of the cut 2062b1 when receiving the load of pulling the both ends from the arrangement of the cut 2062b1 (see FIG. 190(a)). In this state, the yarn Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, so that the yarn Y8 rubs against the long screw B11 and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side with respect to the position where the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cut 2062b1 from being arranged at a position (vertical lower portion of the center of the sphere) where the shot sphere comes into contact with the outer rail 2062. Therefore, the cut 2062b1 collides with the shot sphere. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Further, a person who conducts an illegal act performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end (the ball P8 is fixed because the ball P8 is fixed to the player side of the yarn Y8. The end on the side where it is located (see FIG. 182) is pulled to the front side to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area, so that the yarn Y8 approaches the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 close to the player side. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c toward the front, the yarn Y8 can be made to enter the cut 2062c more easily than when the cut 2062c is arranged near the rear side.

A button-type switch SW11 including a detection portion protruding downward is provided in the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b. The button type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than a load generated when the gate member 68a rotates by the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is arranged to be switchable between ON and OFF when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.

190(a) and 190(b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passageway 2062c. Note that FIG. 190(a) shows a state in which the weight 68a2 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side by the weight of the weight 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68, and in FIG. 190(b), The state where the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening/closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted to the foul ball passage 2062c side is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 190(a), the route of the yarn Y8 used in the misconduct is shown as a reference and the button type switch SW11 is turned on, and in FIG. 190(b), the button type switch is shown. It is shown that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return ball prevention member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing sphere, and gives a resistance enough to stop the sphere passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing part 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in FIG. 190(a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190(a) is restored by the time when the ball is next guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (0.6 seconds after the shortest). This is because it is possible.

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 has a large resistance to an object that does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object that advances while filling a passage such as an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraud.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is made to travel through the foul ball passageway 2062c in a direction opposite to the downward direction of the ball, reach the inside of the game area, and try to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bend a nail (not shown) implanted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emit a laser from the tip. Cheating (eg cutting nails) is possible.

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that in FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that intrudes illegally is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the distal end of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in the Fal ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the downward direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is advanced while being repulsed. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (state in which the weight 68a2 is rejected by the tip of the endoscope) shifts to the state shown in FIG. 190(a), it is connected to the tip of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still disposed below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a2 is maintained in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is difficult to remove the opening/closing portion 68a1 and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from further moving inward.

Here, when the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is destroyed to enter the inside, it is impossible to prevent fraudulently as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, it is possible to control so as to sound an alarm when the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time. , Can detect fraud early.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, it may be controlled so that the payout of the balls from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the button type switch SW11 is turned off only when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. Therefore, the period during which the payout of the balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain the state in which the dispensing of the balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped.

The member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in the present embodiment, when the return ball prevention member 68 on the side provided on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it is possible to quickly Can be exchanged. As a result, as compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, the effect that it can play a role of preventing fraud before replacement and the trouble of searching for the storage location can be saved. The effect can be achieved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, a structure in which the gate member 68a is pivotally supported by a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be provided) may be used.

Further, whether the return ball prevention member 68 has the effect of preventing fraud when it is replaced due to cracking, bending, or the like, depends on the degree of damage of the return ball prevention member 68. , The person who commits the misconduct does not know whether or not the replacement has been performed, and even if the replacement has been performed, the extent of the damage cannot be known, so that the deterrence of the misconduct can still be maintained. it can.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the gathering position or the fully open position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 according to the twelfth embodiment can rotate even at the expanding position. It is composed of modes. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 is different from the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment in that the flange portion 2887 that extends radially outward from the rear end outer edge and the flange portion 2887 thereof. The restriction portion 2888 is provided so as to project from the extending front end of the flange portion 2887 to the back side. The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is different from the loose fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment only in the back cover 2886, and is provided with the same parts as the loose fitting device 880 in other parts. ..

The restriction portion 2888 is provided so as to project to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 is provided so as to project to a position where it can contact the front side portion 802b but cannot contact the rear side portion 802a.

In the present embodiment, the case where the single flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 are arranged will be described, but they may be scattered at a plurality of positions on the back cover 2886. Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulating portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal movement device 2800, and FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. .. Note that in FIGS. 193 and 194, an operation example of the petal operation device 2800 is illustrated in time series, and simultaneous points are shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 194(a), 193(b), and 194(b), respectively. Is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b), for convenience, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section, and in the same cross section, the pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), the pair of screw insertion portions 2803S arranged inside the both-side slits 815 are formed on the surfaces facing each other with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center. The inclined surface 2803T is provided so as to incline away from the 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed to be inclined by about 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the regulating portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petals 802 are slid in a posture in which the restriction portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petals 802 ( When the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), the restricting portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

If the petal 802 is further slid while the petal 802 is receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888 (the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), the petal 802 receives the load. In order to change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 that is fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a) (the posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 194( b ), it is possible to change the posture to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the central slit 814 and the side slits 815. The posture of the petal 802 changes as much as possible.

By changing the postures of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 in this way, the load from the restricting portion 2888 is received and the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), the slide member 2820 has the narrow slide ribs 803a only in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the friction resistance is suppressed and the slide member 2820 has the slits 814, 815. It can be moved smoothly in the longitudinal direction.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 is in contact with the both side slits 815, the slide rib 803a being in contact with the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T being in contact with the inner inner wall. (Pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance is significantly increased. Since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both directions in the lateral direction of the both-side slit 815, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. ..

Therefore, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 194( b ), the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 against the movement of the slits 814, 815 in the longitudinal direction increases, so that the slide member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814, 815. Without waiting, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the slide member 2820 in the normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the oil damper 805 and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined posture).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction from the front is started from the state shown in FIG. 193(b). This direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 move away from the regulating portion 2888, so that the load applied to the petals 802 from the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800. Note that FIG. 195 illustrates the state after the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193(b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal movement device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise direction in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so the position during expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

196(a), 196(b) and 197 are front views of the petal operation device 2800. Note that, in FIGS. 196(a), 196(b), and 197, a state in which the petals 802 are moved from the expanding position to the collecting position is illustrated in time series.

In FIG. 196(a), from the state shown in FIG. 195, the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the restriction portion 2888. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates from this state in the same direction, as shown in FIG. 196(b), the restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b and the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 are brought into the normal posture. Will be returned.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830, so the petals The rotation operation of 802 is stopped, and the petals 802 slide and move toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to automatically perform the operation of rotating the petal 802 at the expanding position and then returning the petal 802 toward the gathering position.

The case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts against the restricting portion 2888 has been described, but if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view). Therefore, since the front side portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888 can be prevented from contacting each other, it is possible to move the petal 802 to the fully opened position and rotate the petal 802 at the fully opened position also in this embodiment.

As for the arrangement of the restricting portion 2888, the petal 802 slightly changes its posture even if it does not come into contact with the petal 802 at the gathering position or the fully open position, or even if it comes into contact with the petal 802 rotating at the fully open position. By setting the position where the restriction portion 2888 can be slipped through and the load can be received, it is possible to prevent the restriction portion 2888 from interfering with the rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restriction portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it serves as a mark as to whether the petal 802 passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern. The petal 802 can be expanded to the maximum to perform the rotational operation, or the expansion can be performed halfway to perform the rotational operation due to the difference in perspective.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of perspective of the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the mold can be made to function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the rendering device.

Note that the restriction portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 in a front view. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petals 802 may come into contact with the restricting portion 2888 to slightly change the posture, and this may be used as an effect (for example, an effect that indicates the magnitude of the jackpot expectation). In this case, the meaning of the petal 802 can be changed depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (with flapping) while abutting against the regulating portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture. ..

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 comes into contact with the regulating portion 2888 is the tip position, but if the position where the petal 802 comes into contact with the center (if the arrangement of the petal 802 is different), the posture of the petal 802 changes. The degree of expansion varies. Therefore, even if the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, it is possible to change the extent of expansion of the petals 802 when the posture changes by a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates together with the rotary plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 in the expanding position has been described, but the petal operation device according to another example of the twelfth embodiment. The slit member 3810 of the 3800 is configured to be switchable between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotary plate 830 and a case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199, an operation example of the petal operation device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a) is illustrated in time series. Further, in FIGS. 198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rails 832 of the rotary plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. It is similar to the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together with each other in excess of the resistance provided, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross-section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the slide member 2820, which receives a load from the guide rail 832, because the slide pin 823 is inserted into the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830, the slide member 2820 of the guide rail 832. With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). Then, in the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this way.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the width of the central slit 814 is increased in the wall portion on the clockwise side in front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814. Among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a provided and the side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side in the front view of the central slit 814, the both side slits 815 are formed on the wall portion on the clockwise side in the front view. Of the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the clockwise-side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in a manner to widen the width in the short-side direction and the side slits 815 that are disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in a front view. A counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in a manner that widens the width in the lateral direction of the both-side slits 815 is mainly provided in the wall portion on the clockwise side in front view.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the clockwise-side recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the central recessed portion 3814a is continuous from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (downward in FIG. 198(a)). Is formed.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is located on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)) from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803. Are continuously formed.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotary plate 830 of the petal operation device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise in the front view will be described. First, when the rotary plate 830 starts to rotate clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (the slide rib 803a at the right end is clocked). It moves in the direction in which it enters the rotation-side recessed portion 3815a) (see FIG. 198(b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portion of the side slit 815 on the counterclockwise side in front view and the flat plate member 2803 is released, and thus the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in contact with the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). It rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, with the first contacting portion with 3810 as the fulcrum (see FIGS. 199(a) and 199(b)).

Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recessed depth than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a, the guide pin 822 during the rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above. The contact between the central recessed portion 3814a and the central recessed portion 3814a, and the contact between the threaded portion 2803S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a recess depth such that the rotating tip portion (the left side portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not come into contact with the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the above-described rotation. The surrounding recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is lower than the resistance applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. .. This prevents the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 from rotating together.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screw-in portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal, a front view The slide rib 803a on the center side in the radial direction, which is housed in the both-side slits 815 on the clockwise side, comes into contact with the wall portion of the both-side slits 815, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise-side recessed portion 3815a moves counterclockwise in front view from the recessed base end of the clockwise-side recessed portion 3815a.

That is, since the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in a state of moving in the radial direction (see FIG. 194(a)), by continuously rotating the rotary plate 830 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and The flat plate member 2803 can be moved to the center side in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, when the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotary plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 after the state shown in FIG. The case where the rotary plate 830 independently rotates and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained can be switched.

Accordingly, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can perform an operation that cannot be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed in the middle of the expanding operation accompanied by rotating the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 194(b). )), the rotational movement of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (rotating along with the slit member 3810) before returning to the changed posture. Rotation operation) (see FIGS. 195, 196(a) and 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed in the middle of the expanding operation accompanied by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 198 ( By rotating the rotating plate 830 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199(b)). That is, the rotation operation of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored (rotational operation of rotating along with the slit member 3810) is performed. It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expanding operation accompanied by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 198(a)), by rotating the rotary plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in a front view, a flat plate member 2803 and a flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) are obtained. From the position of the petal 802 that is fastened and fixed, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) rotate (see FIG. 195(a)) while expanding (see FIG. 195(a)), and then move to the gathering position. Since it is possible to diversify the arrangement of the petals 802 when performing the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 197), it is possible to diversify the operation of the petal operation device 3800.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed of a plate having no opening has been described. However, in the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment, the lower frame member 8320 is curved. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202(a) and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 200 and 202(a) show the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) shows the tilting device 310 at the first state. A state in the middle of changing from one state to a second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment is not described in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments with respect to the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320. Yes, other configurations have been substantially described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other configurations will be described only as a supplementary explanation.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is disposed so as to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially oval shape at the left-right center position. The first through hole 8326a and the left and right of the vibrating device 5400 have a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape as viewed in the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined. A pair of second through holes 8326b that are formed along the bottom plate portion 321 and that connect the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes that are formed in the left and right corners in a vertically elongated rectangular sectional shape in a front view. A through hole 8326c is mainly provided.

The respective through holes 8326a to 8326c are for the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as the above-mentioned drinking water downward and for the purpose of facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13, V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. And a through hole having. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, for a player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is an obstacle to forcefully stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or because it is meaningless to the player of interest, the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330 and the member 330.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but the possibility that foreign matter will be inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate about a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) arranged at the rear end portion, that is, is supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position of the tilting device 310 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction is, the more easily it is displaced (deformed) in the left-right direction near the front end. Note that this positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation that utilizes rattling that occurs due to the sum of design errors that are incorporated between members during the design stage, or positional deviation that occurs when each member is slightly deformed. (Transformation) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is designed not to be the gap V13 for inserting a coin-shaped foreign substance (for example, a 1-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to the left or right (for example, the left side), the gap V13 that can be formed on the other side (for example, the right side) has upper frame members 330 on the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The gap V13 has a total size of the gaps V13 formed between and, and may have a size in which a coin-shaped foreign substance can be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the left and right upper frame members 330 of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign substance may be inserted.

In addition, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also set in the tilting device 310 by using the play in the vicinity of the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310. The gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load to the back side and shifting (deforming) the position, so that a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14.

In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 tilts while a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted in the left or right gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 or the gap V14 in the front-back direction, the coin -Shaped foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are formed in a shape that narrows inwardly toward the left and right in the vertical center, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. While a good feeling of operation can be created, the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)) protrudes outward from above the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320 so that the lower frame member 8320 can easily enter the lower frame member 8320.

When the tilting device 310 is operated in the state where coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. Further, the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i are rubbed with each other, so that the translucency of the protective lens member 311i is deteriorated, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be executed by the operation device 8300. Therefore, the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. If it is discovered that the operation has been performed, it is desirable to remove it promptly. However, in the state where the through hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, it was necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

203(a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203(b) is a side view of the operating device 8300 in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(c) is 203(d) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 taken along the line CCIIId-CCIIId of FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(e) is of FIG. 203(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device 8300 in a CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

The first through hole 8326a has the same horizontal center as the horizontal center of the vibrating device 5400, and is formed with a lateral width larger than the lateral width of the vibrating device 5400 (first housing portion 5431, see FIG. 58). It Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right center positions of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400. It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extended portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (left and right in the vertical direction in the second state). Inclining device 81 is inclined toward the center of the left and right in the first state due to being bent toward the center, and inclination device 82 is inclined toward the front side due to the inclination device 310 being inclined. 201), it is possible to facilitate removal of coin-shaped foreign matter through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the size of the first through hole 8326a can be suppressed to the necessary minimum while facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. .. For example, as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign substance in a portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. The size is larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, a portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits the light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell 313a, the plate portions of the lens members 313 that are continuously provided on the left, right, upper and lower sides of the spherical shell 313 are mirror-finished in the present embodiment (members that have been mirror-finished). Is fixed), so that the light passing through the spherical shell 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, by using the first through hole 8326a, there is a difference in the amount of light that is transmitted through the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the light amount of the first through hole 8326a, the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

Note that when a coin-shaped foreign object is arranged at a position that partially closes the first through hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign substance (the coin-shaped foreign substance becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to make it easier to notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame is not noticed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the member 8320 will remain. It should be noted that this effect is not limited to the case of being visually recognized through the first through hole 8326a, and is the same when being visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is configured as a through hole capable of discharging coin-shaped foreign matter that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left and right width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm] and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size capable of discharging the largest coin-like foreign substance (for example, a 500-yen coin). The width in the normal direction of is about 2 [mm].

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the left-right center of the bottom plate portion 321, the second through hole 8326b can be easily moved even after the coin-shaped foreign matter slides downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321. Can remove coin-shaped foreign matter.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on both left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibration device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be utilized for the outward discharge.

The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203(a)), and the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right sidewalls of the tilting device 310, It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in the upright state (posture).

That is, the length in the lengthwise direction of the third through hole 8326c needs to be formed in such a size that coin-like foreign matter can be discharged when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is about 30 [mm] when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the lateral width is formed to be about 2 [mm].

When removing the coin-shaped foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the cover 370 and exposing the operation device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which the fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 is inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is depressed through a screw that is vertically inserted. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation portion 15a is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screw with the front frame 14 opened (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 that is opened to the right outside at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)). Including the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting/receiving a signal to/from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4 ).

Therefore, even in the unlikely event that the coin-shaped foreign matter cannot be taken out, by removing the screw that fastens the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353, the operation can be easily performed. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, by preparing a replacement for the normal operation device 8300, it is possible to quickly replace the operation device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is sandwiched with the normal operation device 8300.

As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to the operation of the coin-shaped foreign matter entering the operation device 8300 and the normal operation is not performed, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promptly restarted.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the load from the front frame 14 is not received when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described, but the board support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is in the fixed state when the front frame 14 is in the fixed state. It is arranged in such a manner that the load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652 which is arranged so as to be able to abut. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line in FIG. 86. Note that, in FIG. 204(a), a state in which the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 is shown (the front frame 14 is not shown), and in FIG. 204(b), the front frame 14 is shown as the inner frame 12. Is shown closed. In addition, the shape of the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(a) and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(b) are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is vertically displaceable on a front side of a plate portion (a plate portion arranged on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12. A longitudinal displacement member 2652 that is disposed so as to be able to contact the lower end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and that is supported so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction, a locking portion 2653 that projects downward from the longitudinal displacement member 2652, and a longitudinal displacement. The front side of the front-rear displacing member 2652 that abuts on the support portion 2654 that is a portion that sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below at two front and rear positions so as to be displaceable and that is fixed to the plate portion 611a, and the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653. And a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force toward

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state in which it comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface supporting device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), the torsion spring NBb is retracted, and at the upper position shown in FIG. 204(b) (position displaced upward from the lower position), the torsion spring NBb is contacted. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 has a slight gap between the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655 (see FIG. 204(a)) and by being pushed by the front frame 14 and pushed backward. And a rear position (see FIG. 204(b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear tip portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652, and is inclined downward toward the tip side. The inclined surface 2652a extends from the vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in the state where the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the front position to the vertical lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in the state where the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the rear position. , An inclined surface that is continuously connected.

The inclined surface 2652a has a tilt angle and a formation range such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a lower position in the front position of the front-back displacement member 2652 and the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a rear position of the front-back displacement member 2652. Is set.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed by the thickness in the front-rear direction to the side where the load becomes large. be able to.

This makes it possible to increase the load that the post-rotation claw member 640 gives to the game board 13 from the back side, and it is easy to maintain the state where the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation claw member 620. Therefore, the distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the back surface of the front frame 14 (the back surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface supporting device 600 according to the eighth embodiment and the board surface supporting device 600 according to the present embodiment are the same, and are to fix the game board 13. At the time of fixing, the board surface supporting device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses and fixes the hanging back plate portion 621d.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, so that the torsion spring NBb has a spring having a lower elastic coefficient than that of the spring employed in the eighth embodiment. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface supporting device 600 can be reduced, and is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface supporting device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force of the above, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selection by the operator and the workability.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment, the harness HN1 to HN3 is crawled above the reverse cup portion 178 against the illegality of melting the reverse cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire and intruding into the interior as it is, and the harness HN1 to HN3 is heated. The case where burnout is detected by the piano wire that has been burned and the fraud is detected early is described. However, the fraud detection device 2280 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire, The heat is detected and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are prevented from being burnt out.

FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 205(b) illustrates a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a contracted shape, and FIG. 205(c) illustrates a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is returned to the tensile shape (memorized shape) by applying heat. To be done. Further, in FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at the front-rear intermediate position of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 includes a main body box portion 2281 that is formed in a box shape with the rear surface side and the lower surface side opened and is stacked above the reverse cup portion 2178, and the rear surface side so as to cover the rear surface side opening of the main body box portion 2281. And a back cover member 2282 attached from above, and a space is formed between the main body box portion 2281 and the back cover member 2282.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, and extends from the lower right corner portion and extends toward the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the inverted cup portion 2178, and an opening portion 2283 that narrows the opening upward from the lower corner portion. The narrowed portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, the projecting portion 2285 protruding upward from the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284, and the left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 recessed from the rear side. A first conducting portion 2286 which is housed in a concave portion, one end of which protrudes outside the main body box portion 2281 and the other end of which extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the right side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess formed from the back side, one end projects outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left and right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conducting portion 2286. The second conducting portion 2287 formed to have a contactable length, the torsion spring SP15 that generates a biasing force that presses the second conducting portion 2287 against the first conducting portion 2286, and the protruding portion that rides on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284. The shape memory spring 2288 is provided below the second conducting portion 2287 while being supported by the portion 2285.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287, one end of each wiring is connected to a portion protruding to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main controller. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 is released from the state in which the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 205(b)) (see FIG. 205( (See c)), the conduction is cut off, and the disconnection is controlled to output an error signal with the input.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped, and so on. Then, the game is controlled so that it becomes impossible to play the game.

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205(a) to 205(c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left cup portion and the upper portion of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, as compared with the eighth embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is displaced to the left, and the extension portion 2283 is provided between the elongated cup member 173 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire will still cover the long cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further, reaches the shape memory spring 2288 which is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 and arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. Be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, has a characteristic of maintaining a deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a previously memorized shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. .. In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature about the melting point of the inverse cup portion 2178 (about 80°), and the tension shape (see FIG. 205(c)) is stored in advance. ..

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conducting portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 are pushed up. The conduction with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect an illegal act at an early stage.

The extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back lid member 2282 in the longitudinally elongated shape in the front-rear direction, and extends to the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after being in the tension state, the worker pushes the extension portion 2288a downward to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the state (see FIG. 205(b)). ) Can be returned to. That is, even after the fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment, when the light guide member 540 is curved to form a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted to both sides, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform. However, the right panel unit 2500 according to the sixteenth embodiment includes the recessed portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 according to the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) is an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206C schematically shows a downward concave portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. 206D is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically illustrated, and FIG. 206D schematically illustrates a downward concave portion 2543d that is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVId of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206E is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light member 2540, and FIG. 206E shows a light guide member 2540 schematically showing an upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIe of FIG. 206A. It is a partially expanded perspective view. Note that, in FIG. 206(a), the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape that extends straight in the vertical direction. Note that in the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically and vertically in line with the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Where the concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portions 2543 is formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

That is, with reference to the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530, a region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, a region CCVIc arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and a lower and inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the area CCVId arranged on the side and the area CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the region CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b that is concavely formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts is formed. The upward concave portion 2543b has a posture in which flat surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the back side, and the heat press is performed. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is It is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions at the position. Therefore, when the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light exclusively in the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, the emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction inclined upward as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), in the region CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c that is concavely formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts is formed. The downward concave portion 2543c has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and the curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, when the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light exclusively in the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530 side, the emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a direction inclined downward as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), in the region CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d which is concavely formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape in which a sphere is divided into ⅛ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543d has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and the curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side, and the heat press is performed. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, when the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light exclusively in the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550 side, the emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction inclined downward as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), in the region CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e that is concavely formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape in which a sphere is divided into ⅛ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and the curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side, so that the heat press is performed. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, when the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light exclusively in the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, the emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a direction inclined upward as shown in FIG. 206(a).

In addition, the concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as that of the eighth embodiment (the inclination angle with respect to the bottom surface is 45° and the diameter of the bottom circle is approx. 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly vertically refracted, and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 side in the direction of collecting light, and travels toward the outer lens member 550 side in the direction of spreading light. Can be made. That is, it is possible to form the light guide member 2540 in the shape of a flat plate and to give a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces thereof. Therefore, while suppressing the right and left width of the right panel unit 2500, the production of light emission effect is achieved. The effect can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward is set as the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be satisfied by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 moves to the push-in end has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is set to the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of “a button that cannot be pressed” can be performed. it can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (the end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship that causes a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the generation of the impact sound of the collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to notice that the "push-down button" is not activated until the tilting device 310 is pushed. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d can be changed in the state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other, and therefore the engaging rib 344c can be rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 is raised can be changed. Therefore, more tilting operation states of the tilting device 310 can be formed than in the first embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched) by the drive mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction. This makes it possible to perform the effect in a complicated operation mode in which the rising position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing deterioration of the drive motor 342 by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

In the third embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of the motion has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of operation. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the push-in end (during the descending operation), the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation shaft, and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before reaching the end and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 can be reduced while the tilting device 310 is being pushed repeatedly, while the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is started. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the accommodating member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside thereof. When the accommodation member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the protruding leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end, If the configuration is such that the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 is changed, and it is configured to switch whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut the housing member 5430. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in association with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. Therefore, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or more, the flexible member 5420 is operated. It is possible to form a state in which the weight member 5412 is in contact with the housing member 5430 by increasing the deformation amount of. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player operates the tilting device 310. It is possible to increase the variation of production.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "Press the button." is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "Press the button. Push it at a high speed and feel the vibration." By displaying such as "Great chance.", it is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to push the button (tilt device 310). In this case, by determining whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilt device 310) by the specified push method as a condition for transmitting vibration to the player, the button (tilt device 310) can be pressed by the specified push method. It is possible to increase the player's motivation for the operation and prevent the operation of the button (tilt device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Regarding the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the magnitude relationship with the degree of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is low, the deformation amount of the flexible member 5420 may be large, and the weight member 5412 and the containing member 5430 may be in contact with each other. In this case, the fact that the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 is low can be a condition for transmitting the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to the player, and it is recommended to the player to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 forcibly, and prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 forcibly.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to contact the housing member 5430 in a state where the tilting device 310 is not pushed, while the weight member 5412 is pushed to the end of the movement while the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the movement. 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it cannot be brought into contact with the housing member 5430. In this case, while the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player to make the performance lively, while the vibration is stopped when the player pushes the device down, so that the player can change the mode of the performance (expected) by a method that is hard to be noticed by the surroundings. It is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the presentation mode, except for the surrounding players. it can.

As a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to operate the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 in a non-contactable arrangement, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 continue. It is desired to cause both of the cases where the weight member 5412 can come into contact with each other, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is tilted and deformed to bring the disc cam 5344 and the releasing member 346 into contact with each other to generate a frictional force has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored partially projects in a direction close to the disc cam 5344 and abuts when the disc cam 5344 is tilted and deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving portion, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the operable releasing member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where both the board surface supporting devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to contact the front frame 14 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600 may be configured to be able to contact the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, a portion of the multifunction cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface supporting device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board surface supporting device 600 arranged in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that descends and inclines toward the front side, and the front end portion thereof is a back side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. You may comprise so that it may be arrange|positioned below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board surface support device 600 from there, the game board 13 13 can be mounted on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, since the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface supporting device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height when the game board 13 is fixed, the work of fixing the game board 13 The efficiency can be improved.

In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or may be a combination of back and forth and left and right bends. In this case, it is preferable to form a long path in the front and rear immediately behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. In addition, since the path of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by making the path bend forward and backward, it is possible to prevent the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145 from interfering with each other. It can be done easily.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is a concave surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is visually recognized lightly. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the path forming ribs 467 and 487 form the path that bends up and down has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts the inner side surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched and sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the speaker connection line 453 is pulled out to the outside of the speaker assembly 450 by the resistance of the sandwiching. Even when a load of 1 is applied, it is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from coming off the speaker 451.

Further, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H while the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi in the range of the protruding length corresponding to the concave depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464. In the range of the length, a step may be formed in the middle so that the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the speaker connecting wire 453 can be sandwiched while the sound leakage is suppressed while sufficiently securing the range where the back wall 461H and the front wall 481H form the double wall.

In the eighth embodiment, when the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the front end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber, and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by extending the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to be equal to that of the proximal end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T, the proximal end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M and the distal end side main body portion 461T are jointly used. A large speaker room may be configured with.

Further, the base end side main body 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the front end side main body 461T, but the size relationship may be reversed, or the volume may be the same. The placement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right end portions, and may be the center in the left and right direction or may be a position between the left and right end portions and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e that form the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, adjacent rib portions are arranged in the left-right direction (the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T. The case where they do not overlap with each other in the connecting direction, the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, the rib portion 467d and the rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a labyrinth, for example, a metal thin wire such as a piano wire is inserted from an opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, It is possible to suppress fraudulent activity by making it difficult to perform fraudulent activity that causes the tip to enter the game area and prolonging the time required for the fraudulent activity. Here, examples of the suppression of the fraudulent activity include suppression of the fraudulent activity itself and suppression of obtaining the profit of the fraudulent activity (successful fraudulent activity).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotary plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotary plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked with each other, the loose fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the gathering operation. Can be made. Accordingly, the sliding operation of the petals 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decoration member 884 can be performed at the same time, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured to rotate coaxially with the rotating plate 830, the loose fitting device 880 is not limited to this. For example, the rotary plate 830 may be configured to expand and contract as the rotary plate 830 rotates, or may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotary axis of the rotary plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides by the operation of the driving side arm member 910 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case where the operation portion rear surface member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening/closing restriction portion 159 when the board surface support device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface supporting device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation portion back surface member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to contact each other in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing restriction portion 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). Since the right side of the board 13 is tilted to the front side), the part of the game board 13 arranged to face the operation part back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are interfered with each other. be able to. Thereby, the front frame 14 can be prevented from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed in the inner frame 12, and the board surface supporting device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface supporting device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 Whether or not 600 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the operation panel back surface member 155 facing the lower board surface supporting device 600 and the game board 13, and the board surface arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. Accordingly, the function of determining the state of the board surface support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multi-function cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multi-function cover member 171 can be improved. it can. For example, the multifunction cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not contact the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, the possibility that the multifunction cover member 171 may be damaged by the collision of the multifunction cover member 171 made of synthetic resin with the metal board support device 600 can be reduced, so that the multifunction cover member 171 can be reduced. Can be used for a long time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light emitted to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, the right panel unit 500 is configured to be switchable between a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and a case where the other surface is arranged on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By arranging the right panel unit 500 to rotate about another axis), it is possible to switch the mode of the light with which the center frame 86 is irradiated. Further, by changing the correspondence between the mode of the light applied to the center frame 86 and the moving accessory that projects inward of the center frame 86, it is possible to diversify the effect.

That is, for example, of the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a in the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are caused to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is placed in a state in which one surface is arranged on the front side and the other surface is Consider switching between the case of being placed on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the movable accessory side, the movable accessory positioned opposite to the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (location near the end) emits light while the outer cover member 520 emits light. When the surface on the 560 side faces the mobile accessory side, the mobile accessory that is arranged to face the wide area of the opening 565 (in a wider range than the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a that emits light, it is possible to switch the light emitting location of the moving accessory.

In this case, for example, the effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory at the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface changes on the side of the outer cover member 560 while shrinking to fit in the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524. The movable accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (expand) in a direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500 at the timing of facing. This makes it possible to change the location where the light is emitted in accordance with the operation of the mobile accessory by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness is increased, the light amount is increased, and clear light is emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is collected. Diffuse (low brightness, low light intensity, light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emission mode of the light emission target (liquid crystal or moving accessory) can be changed.

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed to the moving accessory or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal). In the above, the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture in which the front end 551a is arranged on the back side of the support plate 510. While irradiating, light can be emitted in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the moving accessory or the liquid crystal. Thus, it is possible to emit light in a wide range at a position away from the moving accessory or the liquid crystal while emitting only the details of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments, the case where the yarn Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially bent by the load from the yarn Y8, and is made fragile so that the broken portion falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position through which the folded portion falls. Is also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and control is performed to forcibly stop the launch of the ball, so that early detection of misconduct can be achieved and It is possible to minimize the profit (loss to the gaming machine hall) that can be obtained by a person who engages in cheating.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or by disposing a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810), The operation resistance may be improved by cutting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can be inserted into the wall portions of the both side slits 815 that are arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. The recessed part may be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance due to the inclined surface 2803T entering into the recessed portion.

In the 16th embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of light may be the direction of collecting light or the direction of spreading light. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is a direction inclining upward in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe, and therefore the height of the line of sight of the person walking to select the machine to play. It is possible to make it easier for light to travel toward. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

Further, for example, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe that are the regions that emit light to the inner lens member 530, and an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId that are the regions that emit light to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward, so that the game machine is selected. The light can be made to easily travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking on the other hand, while the light traveling toward the player and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, it is possible to illuminate the spheres stored in the upper plate 17 with light and perform an effect of making the spheres look gorgeous. Therefore, while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is playing the game.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expected value until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. As an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Points that push the player in from the back to the front>
In an operating device having operating means for a player to push in, the operating device has a first state in a normal state, and a second state in which the operating means is arranged at a position overhanging the player with respect to the first state. Two states can be configured, and a biasing means for biasing the operating means from the first state to the second state is provided, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being directed to the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that an operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the effect is produced in the advance position in such a manner as to increase the expectation of the jackpot for the player, it is easy for the player to operate the operation means in the advance position with a large acceleration. It was necessary to design the operating means with high strength. In this case, the operating means becomes heavy as a whole, and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large in size.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is set to the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, and thus the straight up and down direct movement is performed. Then, by causing the amount that cannot be completely operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means, the force of pushing can be released.

Also, from the player's playing posture, when pushing the operation means around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force in the front direction, so the player should naturally weaken the force applied to the operation means. You can

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft rod arranged on the back side for the player, is configured to be tiltable up and down about the shaft rod, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, wherein the tilting means arranges the operating means in a direction opposite to the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means is arranged in the direction opposite to the player in the second state, so that the game is performed in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting the operation means.

Further, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand around the position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be easily pushed in, so that it is possible to provide a new push-in operation method in which pushing acceleration is less likely to occur. It is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the player's pushing operation.

The new pushing method is, for example, placing the outer side surface of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft rod and placing the hand near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, a method of operating by placing the tip of the middle finger near the axis rod and placing the palm in a posture of facing the operating means, and then dropping the palm toward the operating means. To be done.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction, the gaming machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the pushing operation direction of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the operability in the first state is ensured and the second state is achieved. It is possible to prevent the destruction due to the pushing operation in the state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is automatically operable, and includes drive means for generating a drive force for the automatic operation. The drive force of the drive device is pushed by a player. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the game machine A4 acts in a direction that does not work in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the drive means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, with a configuration in which only the push-in operation of the button is possible, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled by the player in the opposite direction and receiving a high load when performing the operation of retracting the button.

In the gaming machine A4, it is possible to form a maintaining state in which the operating device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and a maintaining unit that operates by the driving unit is provided, and the driving unit is provided with an eccentric portion. A rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, and the rotating means is capable of changing a phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state; In the first phase and the second phase, the movable range of the operating means is changed when the maintenance state is released, and the same rotation is performed in both the first phase and the second phase. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while keeping the maintaining means in the maintaining state, and the movement to release the maintaining state is rotated in the phase after the change. By using the means, it is possible to change the moving width of the operating device moved by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means is increased or decreased corresponding to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A gaming machine A6 configured such that the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the biasing means in the direction of the biasing force is caused only by the biasing force, so that the mode of movement is limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintaining means to the operating means, it is possible to increase the types of moving modes of the operating means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 is provided with a light emitting means which is disposed inside the operation device and emits light toward the player, and which is in the second state as compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded, and the gaming machine A7 is characterized.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with a light emitting means, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means in the player's viewpoint as compared with the first state. Since the area of the operating means is reduced as the irradiation range of the light to be expanded is expanded, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the light and improve the effect of the effect, and it is difficult to push the operating means unless aiming. With this mode, the player's force during operation can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes when the operating means moves toward and away from the display means. Characteristic game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means to emit light. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The point that the repulsive force during normal operation is small, while being able to respond to repeated hits>
In an operation device having an operation means that allows a player to perform an operation to a terminal position, a first state and a second state in which a movable range of the operation to the terminal position is wider than that in the first state. It is possible to form and, provided with a first drive means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and a game with a biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state The game machine B1 is provided with a second drive means for generating a drive force for moving the operation means from the first state to the second state in response to an operation by the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that an operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the operating motor is automatically operated by the drive motor, but the elastic constant of the spring is lower. However, in that case, the return of the operation means is delayed, and when the operation of the player is fast, the operation means does not follow the operation of the player, which makes it difficult for the player to perform a continuous hit operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means, while the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the returning of the operating means is quick. By returning the operation means by the two drive means, the return can be speeded up, so that the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with a continuous hit determination means for determining whether or not a continuous hit operation is performed based on a sensor detection value of the operation means of a stroke within a predetermined time, and the second drive means is determined by the detected value of the continuous hit determination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by deciding whether or not to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined by the detection value of the continuous hit determination means, so that the player does not perform the continuous hit operation (for example, single push operation or long press operation). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing back the hand even when the operation is performed).

In the gaming machine B2, the end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether the operating means is arranged at the end position, and whether the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position The moving direction determining means includes a position difference detecting means for detecting, and a moving direction determining means for determining the moving direction of the operating means based on the time relationship between the detected value of the end detecting means and the detected value of the position difference detecting means. The game machine B3, wherein the second drive means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the direction is a direction in which the push-in end returns to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement judged by the movement direction judging means is the direction in which the pushing end returns to the first state, that is, the player's hand moves from the button. Since the second drive means is driven at the timing of moving in the separating direction, it is possible to generate a load for pushing back the operation means in a manner synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that is oscillated and displaced along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. A gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively utilized to generate the driving force for moving the operating means.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means elastically supports the drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. Supporting means, wherein the supporting means has a larger driving force for moving the operating means from the position in the first state toward the position in the second state as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight is in contact with the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By separately generating the driving force, the driving force applied to the operating means can be adjusted while the rotation of the driving motor is maintained. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control for starting or stopping the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight is moved closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position. A gaming machine B6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and abuts the support frame, so the repulsive force generated by the abutment is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves together with the support means in a direction away from the support frame (a direction closer to the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points to use VCM as a braking device and a vibration production device>
A measuring sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operating means, the detecting sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, and measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detecting sensor, and the measuring means. Threshold value determining means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by a predetermined threshold value or more, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold value determining means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic game machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that an operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the player emphasizes that the player can operate lightly, the operation resistance becomes low and the operating means may be damaged by the operation of the player, while when firmly supported, the movement of the operating means itself may be damaged. Although it is possible to reduce the speed and reduce the possibility that the operating means is damaged, there is a problem in that the force required for the player's operation increases, and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for a weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determination means determines whether or not the speed of the operation means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operation resistance only when necessary while reducing the operation resistance when the speed of the operation means is less than or equal to the threshold value. Therefore, it is possible to improve operability and prevent destruction by the repulsion means.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and when the threshold value measured by the threshold value judgment means is equal to or larger than a predetermined threshold value. , The control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed, and the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the operation means is arranged at a position where it can be brought into contact with the voice coil motor. A gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be drive-controlled, the operating means can be decelerated, and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can contact the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing to the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the operating means is controlled by increasing the current flowing to the voice coil motor. While suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, it is possible to gradually improve the degree to which the operating means is braked, and to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during the operation.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be able to contact the operating means, and a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity, and the gaming machine C4 is characterized. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even if the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the case where the value measured by the threshold value judging means is a predetermined threshold value or more with the case where the value measured by the threshold value judging means is a predetermined threshold value or less. A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a movable region of an end portion of the repulsion means, which is an end portion on a side opposite to a side in contact with the operation means, is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end portion of the repulsion means on the opposite side to the side contacting the operation means is narrowed, thereby operating the operation means. When the speed is faster, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<Prevent damage to the driving means by blocking the transmission of driving force with the clutch>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. Releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A game machine D1 characterized by releasing transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that an operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for effect, when the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may occur in the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means while the operating means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (discontinued), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction which is the opposite direction to the first direction, and is driving in the first direction, The game machine D2, wherein the release by the release means functions regardless of whether or not the drive is being performed in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be released depending on the operation direction of the driving unit, the operating unit is operated by the player when the driving unit is driven in the operation direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released. Then, a large load may occur in the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in producing when operating the operating means to produce an effect is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member for locking the button is moved in the releasing direction or the releasing direction is changed depending on whether the driving unit rotates in the forward direction or the reverse direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button can be operated in two modes (a release pattern and a pattern in which the button is not released), but the drive force needs to be cut off in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (discontinued) in both driving directions regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of movement in the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

As a method of canceling the transmission, it is exemplified that the clutch moves in a direction intersecting with the operation direction of the drive means. The intersecting direction means, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or may move in the radial direction.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, an urging means for urging the drive means and the transmission means into a state in which the driving force can be transmitted is provided, and the release means is a contact portion between the drive means and the transmission means. And engaging teeth for transmitting the driving force when they are in mesh with each other, and the engaging teeth have both surfaces facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that the gaming machine D3 is configured to be inclined with respect to the abutting surface in such a manner that the tapering away from the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the releasing means applies the driving force in a meshed state on the abutting surface pressed. On the other hand, since the transmission teeth are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined in such a manner that both surfaces facing the operating direction of the drive means are tapered so as to move away from the abutment surface, the engagement of the engagement teeth causes the transmission means to move from the drive means. They can be separated from each other, whereby the transmission of the driving force can be canceled.

Further, the urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the drive means and the transmission means, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the urging force is applied in the operating direction of the drive means via the engaging teeth. Loaded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmission means as the transmission means moves away from the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not completely disappear away, but the resistance periodically returns. With this, when the player releases the hand, the button can be activated within a short time.

That is, "as an effect", if the player holds the button when the button is driven, one phase of the operation of the button will end up. Then, if the player releases his hand on the way, if the player moves from the end of the 1st phase, the button will be stopped for a longer period of time, and the feeling of "because the player's load has been released" has been eliminated. Get off.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, after the player releases his hand and the load is released, the operating means can be started within a short time. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player has started to move because the load on the player has been released.

The gaming machine D4 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, wherein the engagement surfaces of the transmission means and the release means are formed in a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means approach and separate from each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means collide with each other in the plane, and the transmitting means of the releasing means transmits. It is possible to prevent the movement along the direction of approaching and separating from the means from being stopped. Therefore, it is possible to start the operation of the operation means early after the load from the player is released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operating mode of the operating means is different between the case where the drive means is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the drive means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the plurality of operating modes of the operating means are prepared, and the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any operating mode. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, the operation mode of the operation means is the operation mode of a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means when there is a difference in whether the drive means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction. Similarly, the game machine D6, which is different in operation after the lapse of the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating manner of the operating means, the operating manner for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is the same. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operation means can be improved.

Here, by tying the difference in the operation mode of the operation means to the information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means to the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. Can be watched over.

Further, since the difference in this operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree etc. without watching the operation of the operation means. You can However, normally, the driving means is hidden from the player, and since the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance and the player The operation of the operation means can be monitored.

<Change the position of cam protrusion based on cam rotation>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. First means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and which prevents the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. , An urging means for urging the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position, and an operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. A game machine provided with a terminating means for variably forming a movement terminating end of the operation means, wherein the first means suppresses a position change of the operation means by engaging with the operation means. A release load means for applying a load for releasing the engagement of the one means to the operation means to the first means, the release of the engagement by the release load means, and the movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The game machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single drive means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means that is operated by a cam is fixed at a first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means causes the bulging operation. There is a game machine in which the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation can be changed by the terminating means (for example, see JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam when releasing the lock, the phase of the cam when releasing the lock is changed variously. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing are operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the arrangement space of the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the drive means for driving the operating means. Thus, the driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminating means and the driving means for moving the releasing load means can be used in common, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine E1, the change of the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmitting means, the gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, it is possible to cause a change in the position of the release load means based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as a position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle of the cam and the protrusion or An example is a method of synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion in other phases.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load applied from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operated by the operation of the release load means. A gaming machine E3, in which whether or not and the synchronous operation are switched.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged for the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. And the transmission means are switched synchronously, it is possible to change the synchronous state of the release load means and the transmission means without adding a member.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operation means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates the second rotating member. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but since the rotation cycle is different, the second rotating means is a predetermined one. It is possible to prepare a plurality of types of phases for the first rotating member when the first means is released by contacting the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, a plurality of end positions can be prepared when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operation means is maintained at the first position and the operation means moves toward the second position. , The range of production can be expanded. For example, an effect of gradually separating the end position from the first position and an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device has a first position and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine that is configured to be movable between and has a vibrating unit that has a vibrating unit that vibrates, and a receiving unit that is disposed so as to be able to contact the vibrating unit, the operating unit is disposed at the first position. Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which the vibrating portion cannot abut the receiving means, while the vibrating portion is abuttable to the receiving means when the operating means is arranged in the second position. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

2. Description of the Related Art In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes an operating means that can be operated by a player and a vibrating means that transmits a vibration to the player through the operating means or a frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-242242). (See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, when performing the effect of transmitting the vibration immediately after operating the operating means, it is necessary to detect the operation of the operating means before operating the vibrating means. .. Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operation means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operation means at the moment of pushing the operation means). Depending on the mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not be started before the hand is released, and the vibration may not be noticed by the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section abuts the receiving means depending on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position. Therefore, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, it is possible for the player to feel the vibration only when the player operates the operation means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pushing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the operation mode of the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibrating means is arranged so as to overhang the occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means moves based on the movement of the operating means to change from the separated state to the contact state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means, The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating section can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation intensity of the player can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibrating means without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity, a gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the supporting means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. Thereby, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of the vibration, and at the same time, the displacement generated in the vibrating means during the vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, in the abutting state, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating section, the gaming machine F4.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. In other words, the expansion and contraction of the support means can give momentum when the vibrating section moves in the direction approaching the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has a deformation resistance along the operation direction of the operation means set lower than a deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operation direction of the operation means. ..

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means deforms can be set finely. it can.

Thereby, even if the movement amount of the operating means is small, the expansion and contraction amount of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending a rubber leg along the operation direction of the operating means, or a supporting means enclosing the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of a rubber member, a method of manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail for guiding the supporting means so that the operating means moves in the direction along the operating direction. , A coil spring for urging the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like.

In the gaming machine F3, a portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but is transmitted to the player via the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, and thus to prevent the driving means from being loaded. As a result, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player, who is surprised by the vibration, from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, in the frame portion of the gaming machine, in the vicinity of the upper plate to which the game balls are supplied, the edge portion of the glass frame, etc. Examples thereof include a portion that may be touched by a hand and a housing portion that partially surrounds the operating means.

<One-touch installation of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position. A driving means for generating a driving force for driving; and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, wherein the transmitting means includes a deforming portion that is elastically deformed by an overload. Gaming machine G1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, operating means operable by a player, driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a game machine provided (for example, see JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the driving means generates the driving force for driving the operating means when the player holds and fixes the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means, and the transmitting means. There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the drive means and the drive means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deforming portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means, or the driving means and the transmitting means. It is possible to alleviate the load applied to the connecting portion of and.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, and the deformable portion constitutes a connecting portion with the rotary shaft of the cam member. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force is generated.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion has a role as a part for elastically deforming the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means, and a part as a part for generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft. Therefore, the structure of the transmission member can be simplified because the functions are shared. For example, an individual fixing member such as an e-ring can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is convex in parallel with the rotation axis, the convex portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is caused by the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the protruding portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to form the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformable portion causes the rotation shaft to tilt with respect to the cam member. Compared with the case where the cam member is slidably moved, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deforming portion is compared with the rotating shaft as compared with the first rotating direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the protruding portion. A game machine characterized in that a deformation resistance becomes larger in a second rotation direction in which a straight line that is perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the convex portion and the extending direction of the rotation shaft is rotated. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, the deformation resistance of the deforming portion is made different for each direction, so that the state after the deforming portion is elastically deformed in the rotational axis direction view is Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the protruding portion of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the protruding portion moves, so that the load generated between the protruding portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is mitigated. can do.

In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the cam member is provided with a friction member spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformable portion elastically deforms to change the posture of the cam member, The gaming machine G5, wherein the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3 or G4, when the operating means is overloaded, the deformable portion elastically deforms, the posture of the cam member is changed, and the cam member and the friction member are separated from each other. The contact resistance can increase the operation resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

The gaming machine G6 according to any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, further comprising detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is inclined and displaced with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation in which the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the expected displacement due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the drive unit for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detecting means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detecting means is, the more complicated the structure of the detecting means becomes and the more expensive. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult to inexpensively configure an overload occurrence at an early stage.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detection means can detect whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the shaft. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the overload is generated at the same time when the detection unit detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the drive unit for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detection units. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the drive unit when an overload occurs.

<A ball-got prevention structure with a thread. Gaming machine H>
In a gaming machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball that flows back toward the launching device can pass, out of the game balls that have been launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows passage of the flowing down game ball. A gaming machine H1 provided with a one-way blocking means for blocking the progress of an object flowing backward.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act is performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a game machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (see, for example, JP-A-2015-024179). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth at the time of launch and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time, when the launch strength of the game ball is weak, It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. Therefore, for example, prepare a fraudulent tool with game balls connected to both ends of the thread, and shoot one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread with a weak firing intensity to flow into the foul ball passage and return it to the player side. While holding the one game ball that has been held, by driving the other game ball that is connected to the other end of the thread into the game area, you can remove the thread from the guide path and pass it through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to make a state in which the game sphere and the other game sphere are connected by a thread, the thread connected to the other game sphere is externally loaded, and the other game sphere arranged in the game area. There is a problem in that there is a possibility that an illegal profit may be obtained by controlling the.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way obstruction means is used even when an illegal act of applying a load to the other gaming ball by using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage is performed. However, by preventing the movement of the yarn in the backward flow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate an illegal profit.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends a flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the yarn guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the yarn can be cut early.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided on the inner corner side of the bend with a load means that does not apply a load to the flowing down game ball and loads the backflowing object.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, it is possible to apply a load to an object (for example, a thread-shaped member) that flows backward by the load means.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is arranged in a recessed portion that is recessed with a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, wherein the gaming machine H4 is provided.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, it is possible to avoid the load means and the game ball from colliding, and the load means is damaged. Can be prevented.

In the gaming machine H3 or H4, a gaming machine H5 characterized by comprising a regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the restricting means restricts the outward movement of the foul ball passage of the loading means, so that the thread-shaped member and the loading means are connected to each other. It is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened by the load means deforming outward of the foul ball passage when a load is generated.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a foul ball is provided with a receiving tray that is the first dish to reach on the front side of the front door, and the receiving tray is a portion that discharges the gaming balls delivered from the dispensing device. The game machine H6, wherein the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball paid out from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, thereby passing through the foul ball passage. When a cheating act is performed in which a load is applied to the other game ball by using the yarn guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to give a load, and the durability of the yarn is reduced. be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge portion, which is a part for discharging the game ball paid out from the payout device, to the receiving tray which is the tray where the foul ball reaches first on the front side of the front door. A gaming machine H7, characterized in that the gaming machine H7 is located below a lower end of an outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, an illegal act is performed in which the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage is used to load the other gaming ball. In this case, it is possible to easily give damage to the yarn by the game balls dispensed.

<Board holding structure. Amusement machine I>
The game means used during the game, and the one side which is the side facing the game means is opened, and the receiving means capable of receiving the game means from the one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the game means. The game device is provided with state changing means for changing the game means from the unusable state, which is the unusable state, to the usable state, which is the usable state. In this case, the gaming machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the game means from the one side.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is possible to rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state where the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state where the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a game machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the gaming board is pushed into the in-use position, so if the pushing of the gaming board is halfway, it is pushed again. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, which may reduce the work efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means is provided with the approaching means which is close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is in the use state, the game board is not pushed. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the game board, and by applying a pushing force, there is an effect that the game board can be pushed to the position of the used state.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side when the state is changed to an unusable state that disables the gaming means. ..

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is changed to the unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. The effect that the work efficiency of work can be improved is produced.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means makes the gaming means unusable, and the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means. Gaming machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removing work of the gaming means can be improved, and at the same time, the gaming Since it is performed along with making the means unusable, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means includes an abutting means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the contact changing means receives a load from the gaming means, and the state changing means changes to the usable state. Therefore, by pressing the gaming means against the state changing means, the usable state can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the game means is configured such that one side of the receiving means is supported by an axis and the other side is brought into proximity to be received by the receiving means, and the state changing means is the receiving means. A gaming machine I5, which is disposed on the other side of the gaming machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to efficiently apply a load to the contact means via the gaming means by utilizing the width dimension of the gaming means.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means is unusable by the state changing means making the gaming means unusable. When maintaining the state, a gaming machine I6, which is provided with a blockage restricting portion for blocking an opening on one side of the game means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means determines whether the gaming means can be used depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do it. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means maintains the unusable state.

<Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire from getting stuck. Amusement machine J>
The game means used during the game and the receiving means which is open on one side opposite to the game means and can receive the game means from the one side, and the receiving means are the game means. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the gaming machine J1 comprises an arranging means arranged on a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of locations.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud by inserting a piano wire from the rotary shaft side of the front frame (for example, see JP-A-2016-26573). ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the fraud prevention section is only provided in one place, and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the arranging means is arranged on the path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, so that fraud prevention is prevented. The effect of can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the arranging means is different from a first means for suppressing the entry of external members at the first location and a second means for suppressing the entry of external materials at the second location. A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of a member from the outside by a method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different in the method for suppressing the entry of the member from the outside between the first location and the second location, so that the arrangement means is simply used. It is possible to further suppress the entry of the member from the outside as compared with the case where the number of is increased.

It should be noted that the method of suppressing entry from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking a route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraud by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means is provided with an intrusion restricting portion formed in a cup shape opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, so that it is possible to prevent the invading member from further intruding.

In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting the electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the gaming means. Characteristic game machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J3, when a fraudulent occurrence of penetration of the entry control section by high heat occurs, a change (wiring due to heat or the like) generated in the wiring due to the high heat is detected from the outside. The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can be easily produced.

The gaming machine J5 according to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, characterized in that the arranging means includes a canceling means for guiding a member that has entered from the outside to a canceling area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, since the member that has entered from the outside is guided to the elimination area far from the gaming device by the arranging means, the entry of the member that entered from the outside can be prevented. Even if the degree becomes strong, it is possible to prevent a member that has entered from the outside from reaching the game means.

<Structure of a decorative plate with a structure of 5 sheets. Involve fraud prevention. Amusement machine K>
The first means and the second means are arranged to face each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. A gaming machine including a third means, and a connecting portion that connects the first means and the second means, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting with the first direction. The gaming machine K1 characterized by the above.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means, which are arranged to face each other and are connected by at least one side, are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a game machine provided with a third means (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, where each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, when the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem in that the third means may be damaged by the third means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion that connects the first means and the second means is set to the second direction that intersects the first direction, the third means has the first direction. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2, wherein the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connecting means is connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is the connected means. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction that is close to each other, and the second means is connected by being fitted to each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 is provided with a connected means connected to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. Are connected and fixed by fitting that occurs by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction that is close to the connected means. The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is arranged so as to be exposed outward, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. Thereby, even if a fraudulent act of disassembling the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, it is possible to accelerate the detection of the fraudulent act.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction of the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, one of the first means and the second means, which irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means. A light guide means that is fixed to the member and is configured to be able to introduce the light emitted by the light irradiating means into the game machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the first and second means and the light guide means.

In the gaming machine K6, a gaming machine K7 is provided with an abutting means for making a surface abutment in a region where the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means face each other.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, in the opposing area of the light guide means and the other member of the first means or the second means, maintain a space corresponding to the size of the contact means. You can This prevents the gap between the light guide means and the other member of the first means or the second means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. You can

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even when a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means is attempted to disassemble illegally. can do.

<Point L for utilizing the curved light guide means. The point is not reached>
Light guide means formed in a curved wave shape as viewed in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and projection means arranged to face the light guide means and projecting the light passing through the light guide means. The projected means includes a concave surface facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guiding means, and a convex surface facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a light guide plate that uniformly emits light incident from an end surface (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitted light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means has the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guiding means is constant, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are provided. The light emission intensity of the projection means can be changed by the section.

In the gaming machine L1, in the projected means, the concave facing portion is made of a light transmissive material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion where the light emitted from the light guide means is condensed It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

In the gaming machine L2, there is provided an opposite projection means which is arranged on the opposite side of the projected means with the light guide means interposed therebetween and which projects the light passing through the light guide means. The gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light means facing the concave surface portion and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex surface portion are formed of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L2, a portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means of the back projection means and a portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guide means Since the materials are formed of substantially the same transmissivity, the same light is made incident on the light guide means, so that the light is viewed through the projection means and the light is viewed through the back projection means. And can be different.

<Bass reflex speaker layout structure. Gaming machine M>
First means and second means which are arranged to face each other and are fixed to each other, and which form an internal space in a fixed state; acoustic means arranged in a state where at least a part of the internal space is made to enter; A game machine M1 comprising: a bending means that forms a bending path in an internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are provided at both left and right ends of a front frame, and an effect is produced by a sound output from the speakers (for example, see JP-A-2016-16088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling to the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine and sent out to the outside of the gaming machine, so that it is easy to produce a bass sound. However, there is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left and right width of the game machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means configures the bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by configuring the path longer than the length of one piece, The oscillating wave can be propagated at an arbitrary distance by canceling the regulation of the lateral width.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in a manner in which loads are applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is rib-shaped from at least one of the first means and the second means toward the other. A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it has a projecting portion projecting therefrom, and a projecting tip of the projecting portion contacts the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means and the second means. By contacting and, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means and the second means as a result of fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as an oscillating wave from passing through the gap in the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening portion that connects the internal space and the outside, and the opening portion is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening portion and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, since the opening is closed by the passage member connected to the acoustic means, it is unnecessary to prepare an additional closing member, The wall forming the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion is, the gaming machine M4.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the protruding portion and being disconnected. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a production means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect accompanying a game. A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the production means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported from below by the production means, so that the weight of the support fastening means can be reduced without pressing the space used for the production. The thing can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in reverse. Petals that stop on the way. Amusement machine N>
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction, In a gaming machine provided with a second displacing means which is switchable in a non-following state in which it is displaced in a direction different from the displacing direction of the first displacing means, when at least the second displacing means is in the following state, A gaming machine N1 comprising a third displacement means that is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the extension/contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means is extended/contracted, while the first displacement means is operated near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacing means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion/contraction operation direction of the first displacing means when the game is played (for example, see JP 2011-229580 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the production is slow and the production effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the third displacing means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacing direction of the second displacing means at least in the follow-up state of the second displacing means. , And can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 is provided with resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the follow-up state and the non-following state. A gaming machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, by the action of the resistance means, a follow-up state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and a non-following state that deviates from the follow-up state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the number of types of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by using a driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Amusement machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, and thus also serves as the driving means. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means has the function of changing the state of the first displacement means and makes the player visually recognize it. It can also be used as a function as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 includes rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means coaxially rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4, the first displacing means, the second displacing means, and the shaft means functioning as the rotation axis of the resistance means are fixed to the base member. As the posture of any one of the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also follow and change, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from rising excessively. You can

<Use of shell buttons and holes. The point is not reached>
In a gaming machine provided with a first means and a housing means configured to house the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A game machine O1 provided with one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes operating means that a player can operate and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and in which the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, (See JP 2012-048970 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a foreign matter is inserted into the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign matter remains inside and may cause a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 has the second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, so that the foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the accommodation means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening portion is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. A gaming machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O1, it is possible to form the second opening while maintaining the support strength of the support portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the housing means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water resistance portion, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening. That is, it can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are formed in a shape based on the shape of the solid object projected in different directions. A gaming machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are formed based on the shape of the solid object in the direction difference. The solid object can be easily removed through the part.

The gaming machine O5 according to any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, wherein the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object closes a part of the second opening. Can be made. As a result, it is possible to make the player notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the solid object will remain. ..

Amusement machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3. The gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (stop button) or after a lapse of a predetermined time. The gaming machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Amusement machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3. Any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Amusement machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3. In any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a fraud prevention unit for fraudulent prevention against a fraudulent act of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). Publication).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the fraud prevention function. The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having a good function of preventing fraud.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a game means used during the game and one side opposite to the game means is opened, and the game means can be received from the one side. Receiving means is provided, and the receiving means is provided with arranging means arranged in a path communicating between the game means and the outside, and the arranging means is provided at a plurality of places for entry of an object from the outside. It can be suppressed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the arranging means is a first means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a first location and an outside at a second location. The second means for restraining the entry of the member of the above-mentioned restrains the entry of the member from the outside by a different method.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the arranging means is provided with an intrusion restricting portion formed in a cup shape that is open toward the outside of the receiving means. ..
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the function of preventing fraud can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the fraud prevention function can be improved by changing the fraud prevention method.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the illegality preventing function can be improved by the shape of the arranging means.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13 game board (game means)
14 Front frame (blocking means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex portion (part of concave portion)
17 Upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of receiving plate)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way blocking means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
145, 9145, 10145 Fal ball passage (fal ball passage)
159 Opening/Closing Restriction Section (Blocking Restriction Section)
173 Long cover member (part of the solution)
178 Reverse cup portion (a part of the arranging means, the arranging means , the first means, the intrusion restricting portion, a part of the eliminating means)
178a Wall part (second extended part)
180 Binding Movable Member (Part of Arrangement Means, Second Means, Support Means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operation devices 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilt means, operation means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left detection piece (part of continuous hitting determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right detection piece (part of continuous hitting judgment means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
312a1 Operation surface (a part of operation means)
314 Shaft part (shaft rod)
315 Torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left-side detection sensor (part of continuous hitting determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous hitting judgment means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
330 Upper frame member (part of housing means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing portion (part of support portion)
340, 5340, 6340 Drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 Body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (a part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch (engagement tooth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaging tooth)
343d Coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d Connection pin (convex portion)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintaining means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of the maintaining means, part of the first means)
352 voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 speaker (acoustic means)
453 Speaker connection wire (passing member)
460 Front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming rib (bending means, protruding portion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (a part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing protrusion (part of opening)
487 passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
500 Right panel unit (production means)
500L left double plate unit (first means)
500R Right-hand plate unit (2nd means)
510 Support Plate (Connected Means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support holes (part of the connecting part)
532 Inclined rib portion (contact means)
540 Light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Convex portion (part of connecting portion)
600 board support device (state change means)
620 Rotating front claw member (proximity means)
640 Claw member after rotation (abutting means)
801 Support base material (base member)
802 petals (part of the second displacement means)
804 Central motor (driving means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (Foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintaining means)
2348 Sliding claw member (part of maintaining means)
2888 Regulator (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance part)
5412 Weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 Flexible member (part of support means, repulsion means)
5430 Housing member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 Disc member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of housing means)
8326a First through hole (a part of the second opening)
8326b Second through hole (a part of the second opening)
8326c Third through hole (a part of the second opening)
9142a Right inclined surface (part of pay-out ball discharging portion)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal members (one-way blocking means, loading means)
9145b, 10145c Notches (part of recessed portion)
10145d Rolling plate part (regulating means)
E1 notification device (detection means)
P1a Deformation part (deformation part)
S52 End area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (folding section)
V13, V14 gap

Claims (2)

Comprising a game device for use during the game, a receiving means in which one side is released to open is the side that can accept the game unit, and a closure means capable of closing the one side of the receiving means,
It said closure means comprises an arrangement means disposed in a path communicated between the gaming unit and an external,
It said arrangement means,
A plate-like portion arranged so as to intersect with the path below the game means,
A first extending portion extending downward from the plate-like portion,
A second extending portion that extends downward from the plate-shaped portion and is arranged to face the first extending portion, and a gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box .

Images